HomeMy WebLinkAboutSouth Hills Radio Site Upgrades - Provisions
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
FOR
CITY OF SAN LUIS OBISPO
South Hills Radio Site Upgrades
Specification No. 91584
MARCH 2019
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
ENGINEERING DIVISION
919 Palm Street
San Luis Obispo, CA 93401
(805) 781-7200
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
ii
South Hills Radio Site Upgrades
Specification No. 91584
Approval Date: March 5, 2019
<<Engineer of Record Stamp>>
<<Signature Date>>
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS .................................................................................................... V
BID SUBMISSION ...............................................................................................................................V
BID DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................................................. VI
PROJECT INFORMATION................................................................................................................. VII
QUALIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................. VII
AWARD .............................................................................................................................................. IX
ACCOMMODATION ........................................................................................................................... IX
BID FORMS .................................................................................................................... A
BID ITEM LIST FOR SOUTH HILLS RADIO SITE UPGRADES, SPECIFICATION NO. 91584 .............A
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS ........................................................................................................... C
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10285.1 STATEMENT ........................................................... D
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10162 QUESTIONNAIRE....................................................... D
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10232 STATEMENT .............................................................. D
LABOR CODE SECTION 1725.5 STATEMENTS ................................................................................ D
NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION ..................................................................................................... F
BIDDER ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS ..................................................................................................... G
QUALIFICATIONS .............................................................................................................................. H
ATTACH BIDDER'S BOND TO ACCOMPANY BID ............................................................................... I
SPECIAL PROVISIONS ................................................................................................ 10
DIVISION I GENERAL PROVISIONS ................................................................................................. 10
1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 10
2 BIDDING ..................................................................................................................................... 10
3 CONTRACT AWARD AND EXECUTION ..................................................................................... 10
4 SCOPE OF WORK ...................................................................................................................... 10
5 CONTROL OF WORK ................................................................................................................. 11
6 CONTROL OF MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 11
7 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC ................................................... 11
8 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS ............................................................................................. 11
DIVISION II GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ......................................................................................... 11
13 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ............................................................................................... 11
15 EXISTING FACILITIES .............................................................................................................. 11
16 TEMPORARY FACILITIES ........................................................................................................ 11
DIVISION III EARTHWORK AND LANDSCAPE ................................................................................. 11
19 EARTHWORK ........................................................................................................................... 11
20 LANDSCAPE ............................................................................................................................. 11
21 EROSION CONTROL ................................................................................................................ 11
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
iv
DIVISION V SURFACINGS AND PAVEMENTS ................................................................................. 12
36 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................. 12
37 BITUMINOUS SEALS ................................................................................................................ 12
38 RESERVED ............................................................................................................................... 12
39 ASPHALT CONCRETE ............................................................................................................. 12
40 CONCRETE PAVEMENT .......................................................................................................... 12
41 EXISTING CONCRETE PAVEMENT ......................................................................................... 12
42 GROOVE AND GRIND CONCRETE .......................................................................................... 12
43–44 RESERVED ......................................................................................................................... 12
DIVISION VI STRUCTURES .............................................................................................................. 12
46 GROUND ANCHORS AND SOIL NAILS .................................................................................... 12
51 CONCRETE STRUCTURES...................................................................................................... 12
55 STEEL STRUCTURES .............................................................................................................. 12
60 EXISTING STRUCTURES ......................................................................................................... 12
DIVISION VIII MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION ......................................................................... 12
77 LOCAL INFRASTRUCTURE...................................................................................................... 12
78 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................................ 12
80 FENCES .................................................................................................................................... 12
DIVISION X ELECTRICAL WORK ..................................................................................................... 12
86–88 RESERVED ......................................................................................................................... 12
DIVISION XII BUILDING CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 12
99 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................... 12
SECTION 01045 EXISTING FACILITIES ........................................................................................... 12
SECTION 01110 SUMMARY OF WORK ............................................................................................ 26
SECTION 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS ......................................................................................... 29
SECTION 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .......................................................................... 33
SECTION 01330 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................................... 43
SECTION 01520 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES ................................................................................ 48
SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT ........................................................................................ 52
SECTION 01710 MOBILIZATION....................................................................................................... 57
SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ............................................................. 60
SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION .......................................................................................................... 65
SECTION 02060 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK..................................................... 68
SECTION 02200 SITE CLEARING & PREPARATION ........................................................................ 74
SECTION 02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION......................................................... 77
SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK ......................................................................................................... 85
SECTION 02318 TRENCHING .......................................................................................................... 96
SECTION 02820 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES ...................................................................... 104
SECTION 02939 SEEDING .............................................................................................................. 111
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
v
SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES .................................................................................. 128
SECTION 13121 STEEL-REINFORCED CONCRETE PREFABRICATED BUILDING ...................... 135
SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................... 149
SECTION 16030 ELECTRICAL TESTS ........................................................................................... 159
SECTION 16060 GROUNDING ....................................................................................................... 166
SECTION 16111 RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS .................................................................. 169
SECTION 16123 WIRES AND CABLES .......................................................................................... 182
SECTION 16235 ENGINE GENERATORS ...................................................................................... 187
SECTION 16413 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH ...................................................................... 212
SECTION 16470 LOW VOLTAGE PANELBOARDS ......................................................................... 226
SECTION 16671 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS)............................................................. 233
SECTION 16785 SELF SUPPORTED TOWER ................................................................................ 238
APPENDIX A - FORM OF AGREEMENT ....................................................................... 0
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
BID SUBMISSION
Sealed bids will be received by the City of San Luis Obispo at the Public Works
Administration Office located at 919 Palm Street, California 93401, until
2:00 p.m. on April 18, 2019
at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud. Submit bid in a sealed
envelope plainly marked:
South Hills Radio Site Upgrades, Specification No. 91584
Any bid received after the time and date specified will not be considered and will be
returned to the bidder unopened. Bids received by Fax or Email will not be considered.
By submission of bid you agree to comply with all instruction and requirements in this
notice and the contract documents.
All bids must be submitted on the Bid Item List form(s) provided and submitted with all
other Bid Forms included in these Special Provisions.
Each bid must be accompanied by either a:
1. certified check
2. cashier's check
3. bidder's bond
made payable to the City of San Luis Obispo for an amount equal to ten percent of the
bid amount as a guaranty. Guaranty will be forfeited to the City San Luis Obispo if the
bidder, to whom the contract is awarded, fails to enter into the contract.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
vi
The City of San Luis Obispo reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids or
waive any informality in a bid.
All bids are to be compared based on the City Engineer's estimate of the quantities of
work to be done, as shown on the Bid Item List.
Bids will only be accepted from bidders that are licensed in compliance with the
provisions of Chapter 9, Division III of Business and Professions Code.
The award of the contract, if awarded, will be to the lowest responsive bid submitted by
a responsible contractor whose bid complies with the requirements prescribed. If the
contract is awarded, the contract will be awarded within 60 calendar days after the
opening of the bids.
Failure to raise defects in the notice to bidders or bid forms prior to bid opening
constitute a waiver of those defects.
BID DOCUMENTS
A copy of the plans and special provisions may be downloaded, free of charge, from the
City’s website at:
www.slocity.org/government/department-directory/public-works/public-works-bids-
proposals
A printed copy may be obtained at the office of the City Engineer by paying a non-
refundable fee of:
1. $15.00 if picked up in person, or
2. $25.00 if by mailing to the office of the City Engineer
Request must include Specification Number. The office of the City Engineer is located
at:
919 Palm Street
San Luis Obispo, CA 93401
Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards referenced in the Special
Provisions may be downloaded, free of charge, from the City’s website at:
www.slocity.org/government/department-directory/public-works/documents-
online/construction-documents
A printed copy may be obtained by paying a non-refundable fee of:
1. $16.00 if picked up in person, or
2. $21.00 if by mailing to the office of the City Engineer
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
vii
You are responsible to obtain all issued addenda prior to bid opening. Addenda will be
available to download at the City’s website listed above or at the office of the City
Engineer.
Contact the project manager, Shelsie Kloepper at (805) 783-7735 or the Public Works
Department at (805) 781-7200 prior to bid opening to verify the number of addenda
issued.
You are responsible to verify your contact information is correct on the plan holders list
located on the City’s website at:
www.slocity.org/government/department-directory/public-works/public-works-bids-
proposals.
PROJECT INFORMATION
In general, the project covers upgrades to the existing South Hills radio site, which is
critical in providing communication for public safety radio and operations for the City’s
public response teams.
The project estimated construction cost is $650,000
Contract time is established as 60 working days.
The fixed liquidated damages amount is established at $500 per day for failure to
complete the work within the contract time.
In compliance with section 1773 of the Labor Code, the State of California Department
of Industrial Relations has established prevailing hourly wage rates for each type of
workman. Current wage rates may be obtained from the Division of Labor at:
https://www.dir.ca.gov/oprl/DPreWageDetermination.htm
This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of
Industrial Relations.
There will be a walkthrough on March 26th, 2019 at 10am and 2pm. Bidders should
meet where at time.
QUALIFICATIONS
You must possess a valid Class A Contractor's License at the time of the bid opening.
You and any subcontractors required to pay prevailing wage must be registered
with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Section 1725.5 of the
Labor Code.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
viii
You must have experience constructing projects similar to the work specified for this
project. Provide three similar reference projects completed as either the prime or
subcontractor. All referenced projects must have been completed within the last five
years from this project’s bid opening date.
One of the three reference projects must have been completed under contract
with a city, county, state or federal government agency as the prime contractor.
Failure to provide reference projects as specified in this section and as required on the
qualification form is cause to reject a bid as being non-responsive.
The City reserves the right to reject any bid based on non-responsiveness if a bidder
fails to provide a bid that complies with all bidding instructions.
The City reserves the right to reject a responsive bid based on the non-responsibility of
the bidder if the Director of Public Works or Designee finds, after providing notice and a
hearing to the bidder, that the bidder lacks the
1. knowledge
2. experience,
3. or is otherwise not responsible
as defined in Section 3.24 of the San Luis Obispo Municipal Code to complete the
project in the best interest of the City.
Rejected bidders may appeal this determination. Appeal must comply with the
requirements in this Notice to Bidders.
It is the City of San Luis Obispo’s intent to award the contract to the lowest responsive
bid submitted by a responsible bidder. If in the bidder’s opinion the contract has been or
may be improperly awarded, the bidder may protest the contract award.
Protests must be filed no later than five working days after either:
1. bid opening date
2. notification of rejected bid.
Protest must be in writing and received by the project manager located at:
919 Palm Street
San Luis Obispo, CA 93401.
Valid protests must contain the following information:
1. the reasons for the protest
2. any supporting documentation
3. the ruling expected by the City to remedy the protest.
Any protest not containing all required information will be deemed invalid and rejected.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
ix
The City will consider additional documentation or other supporting information
regarding the protest if submitted in compliance to the specified time limits. Anything
submitted after the specified time limit will be rejected and not be considered.
The Director of Public Works or Designee may request additional information to be
submitted within three days of the request, unless otherwise specified, and will notify the
protester of ruling within ten days of determination.
If the protester is not satisfied with ruling, the protester may appeal the ruling to the City
Council in compliance with Chapter 1.20 of the City of San Luis Obispo Municipal Code.
Pursuant to the Public Records Act (Government Code, § 6250, et seq.), the City will
make public records available upon request.
AWARD
The lowest bidder will be determined using the BID TOTAL.
As a condition to executing a contract with the City, two bonds each equal to one
hundred percent of the total contract price are required in compliance with Section 3-
1.05 of the Standard Specifications.
You may substitute securities for moneys withheld under the contract in compliance with
the provisions of the Public Contract Code, Section 10263.
ACCOMMODATION
If any accommodations are needed to participate in the bid process, please contact
Kathryn Stanley at (805) 781-7200 or by Telecommunications Device for the Deaf at
(805) 781-7107. Requests should be made as early as possible in the bidding process
to allow time for accommodation.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
BID FORMS
A
BID FORMS
All bid forms must be completed and submitted with your bid. Failure to submit these
forms and required bid bond is cause to reject the bid as nonresponsive. Staple all bid
forms together.
THE UNDERSIGNED, agrees that they have carefully examined:
1. the location of the proposed work
2. the plans and specifications
3. read the accompanying instructions to bidders
and propose to furnish all:
4. materials
5. labor
to complete all the required work satisfactorily in compliance with
6. plans
7. specifications
8. special provi sions
for the prices set forth in the bid item list:
BID ITEM LIST FOR SOUTH HILLS RADIO SITE UPGRADES, SPECIFICATION
NO. 91584
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total
No. SS(1) Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures)
1 Construction Coordination LS 1
2 Water Pollution Control LS 1
3 Remove Fence and Gate LF 150
4 Remove Diesel Fuel Tank and
Concrete Pad LS 1
5 Remove Generator and
Concrete Pad LS 1
6 Remove Building and Concrete
Pad LS 1
7 Remove/Relocate Masts and
Antennas EA 5
8 Clearing, Grubbing & Stockpile LS 1
9 Structure Excavation, Backfill
and Compaction CY 15
10 Drilled Concrete Piers EA 3
11 Electrical Trench Excavation,
Backfill and Compaction LS 1
12 Structural Concrete Foundation SF 340
13 Earthwork CY 42
14 Class II Aggregate Base CY 22
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
B
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total
No. SS(1) Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures)
15 Generator LS 1
16 Steel Tower LS 1
17 Pre-Engineered Building LS 1
18 New Fencing and Gates LF 170
19 Fiber Roll LF 200
20 Hydroseed SY 65
21 Electrical Conduit, Wire & Cable
Tray LS 1
22 Temporary Electrical Power
Equipment (one month rental) LS 1
23 Automatic Transfer Switch LS 1
24 Meter Cabinet LS 1
25 Remove/Relocate/Retune
Existing Radio Equipment LS 1
26 Grounding LS 1
Bid Total (or Base Bid) $
Company Name:
(1) refers to section in the Standard Specifications, with modifications in the Special Provisions, that describe
required work.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
C
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Pursuant to Section 4100 of the Public Contracts Code and section 2-1.33C of the
standard specifications, the Bidder is required to furnish the following information for
each Subcontractor performing more than 1/2 percent (0.5%) of the total base bid. Do
not list alternative subcontractors for the same work. Subcontracting must not total more
than fifty percent (50%) of the submitted bid except as allowed in section 5-1.13 of the
standard specifications.
For Streets & Highways projects, subcontractors performing less than ten thousand
dollars ($10,000) worth of work need not be mentioned. Subcontractors required to pay
prevailing wage, must be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations
pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 to be listed.
NOTE: If there are no subcontractors, write “NONE” and submit with bid.
Name Under Which
Subcontractor is Licensed License Number
DIR Public
Works
Registration
Number
Address and Phone
Number of Office, Mill or
Shop
Specific
Description of
Subcontract
% of
Total
Base
Bid
Attach additional sheets as needed.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
D
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10285.1 STATEMENT
In compliance with Public Contract Code Section 10285.1 (Chapter 376, Stats. 1985),
the bidder hereby declares under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of
California that the bidder, or any subcontractor to be engaged by the bidder, has ____,
has not ____ been convicted within the preceding three years of any offenses referred
to in that section, including any charge of fraud, bribery, collusion, conspiracy, or any
other act in violation of any state or federal antitrust law in connection with the bidding
upon, award of, or performance of, any public works contract, as defined in Public
Contract Code Section 1101, with any public entity, as defined in Public Contract Code
Section 1100, including the Regents of the University of California or the Trustees of the
California State University. The term "bidder" is understood to include any partner,
member, officer, director, responsible managing officer, or responsible managing
employee thereof, as referred to in Section 10285.1.
NOTE: The bidder must place a check mark after "has" or "has not" in one of the blank
spaces provided. The above Statement is part of the Bid. Signing this Bid on the
signature portion constitute signature of this Statement. Bidders are cautioned that
making a false certification may subject the certifier to criminal prosecution.
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10162 QUESTIONNAIRE
In compliance with Public Contract Code Section 10162, the Bidder must complete,
under penalty of perjury, the following questionnaire:
Has the bidder, any officer of the bidder, or any employee of the bidder who has a
proprietary interest in the bidder, ever been disqualified, removed, or otherwise
prevented from bidding on, or completing a federal, state, or local government project
because of a violation of law or a safety regulation?
Yes No
If the answer is yes, attach a letter explaining the circumstances
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10232 STATEMENT
In compliance with Public Contract Code Section 10232, you hereby state under penalty
of perjury, that no more than one final unappealable finding of contempt of court by a
federal court has been issued against you within the immediately preceding two-year
period because of your failure to comply with an order of a federal court which orders you
to comply with an order of the National Labor Relations Board.
LABOR CODE SECTION 1725.5 STATEMENTS
The bidder has delinquent liability to an employee or the state for any assessment of
back wages or related damages, interest, fines, or penalties pursuant to any final
judgment, order, or determination by a court or any federal, state, or local administrative
agency, including a confirmed arbitration award. Any judgment, order, or determination
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
E
that is under appeal is excluded, provided that the contractor has secured the payment
of any amount eventually found due through a bond or other appropriate means.
Yes No
The bidder is currently debarred under Section 1777.1 or under any other federal or
state law providing for the debarment of contractors from public works.
Yes No
NOTE: The above Statements and Questionnaire are part of the Bid. Signing this Bid on
the signature portion constitute signature of this Statement and Questionnaire. Bidders
are cautioned that making a false certification may subject the certifier to criminal
prosecution.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
F
NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION
I, , declare that
I am of ,
the party making the foregoing bid that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf
of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or
corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not
directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and
has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or
anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone refrained from bidding; that the bidder
has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or
conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any
overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to
secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested
in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further,
that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any
breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative
thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company
association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate
a collusive or sham bid.
Executed on , 20 , in __
I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the
foregoing is true and correct.
(Signature and Title of Declarant)
(SEAL)
Subscribed and sworn to before me
this _______day of _________, 20_____
Notary Public
Company Name:____________________
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
G
BIDDER ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
By signing below, the bidder acknowledges and confirms that this bid is based on the information contained
in all contract documents, including the notice to bidders, plans, specifications, special provisions, and
addendum number(s) . (Note: You are responsible to verify the number of
addenda prior to the bid opening.)
The undersigned further agrees that in case of default in executing the required contract, with necessary
bonds, within eight days, (not including Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays), after having received a
mailed notice that the contract is ready for signature, the proceeds of the check or bond accompanying his
bid will become the property of the City of San Luis Obispo.
Licensed in accordance with an act providing for the registration of contractors, License No. ,
Expiration Date .
The above statement is made under penalty of perjury, and any bid not containing this information "will be
considered non-responsive and will be rejected” by the City.
Signature of Bidder
(Print Name and Title of Bidder)
DIR– Public Works
Registration No:
Business Name (DBA):
Owner/Legal Name:
Indicate One: Sole-proprietor Partnership Corporation
List Partners/Corporate Officers:
Name Title
Name Title
Name Title
Business Address
Street Address
Mailing Address
City, State, Zip Code
Phone Number
Fax Number
Email Address
Date
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
H
QUALIFICATIONS
Failure to furnish complete reference information ON THIS FORM, as specified in this
project’s Notice to Bidders and indicated below, is cause to reject the bid. Additional
information may be attached but is not a substitute for this form.
Reference Number 1
Customer Name & Contact Individual
Telephone & Email
Project Name (Site Address):
Is this similar to the project being bid?
Yes □ No □
Describe the services provided and how this project is similar to
that which is being bid:
Date project completed:
Was this contract for a public agency?
Yes □ No □
Reference Number 2
Customer Name & Contact Individual
Telephone & Email
Project Name (Site Address):
Is this similar to the project being bid?
Yes □ No □
Describe the services provided and how this project is similar to
that which is being bid:
Date project completed:
Was this contract for a public agency?
Yes □ No □
Reference Number 3
Customer Name & Contact Individual
Telephone & Email
Project Name (Site Address):
Is this similar to the project being bid?
Yes □ No □
Describe the services provided and how this project is similar to
that which is being bid:
Date project completed:
Was this contract for a public agency?
Yes □ No □
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
I
ATTACH BIDDER'S BOND TO ACCOMPANY BID
Know all men by these presents:
That we ____________________________________________, AS PRINCIPAL, and
_______________________________________________________, AS SURETY, are held and firmly
bound unto the City of San Luis Obispo in the sum of:
____________________________________________________ Dollars (_____________) to be paid to
said City or its certain attorney, its successors and assigns; for which payment, well and truly to be made,
we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors or assigns, jointly and severally,
firmly by these presents:
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the certain bid of the above
bounden ______________________________________________________________________
to construct ___________________________________________________________________
(insert name of street and limits to be improved or project)
dated _____________________ is accepted by the City of San Luis Obispo, and if the above
bounden _______________________________________________________, his heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns shall duly enter into and execute a contract for such construction
and shall execute and deliver the two bonds described within ten (10) days (not including Saturdays,
Sundays, or legal holidays) after the above bounden,
______________________________________________________, has received notice by and from the
said City of San Luis Obispo that said contract is ready for execution, then this obligation shall become null
and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and virtue.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we hereunto set our hands and seals this ___ day of ______, 20____.
Bidder Principal:
Signature Date
Title:
Surety:
Bidder's signature is not required to be notarized. Surety's signature must be notarized.
Equivalent form may be substituted
(Rev. 6-30-14)
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
10
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ORGANIZATION
Special provisions are under headings that correspond with the main section heading of
the Standard Specifications. Each special provision begins with a revision clause that
describes or introduces a revision to the Standard Specifications. Any paragraph added or
deleted by a revision clause does not change the paragraph number of the Standard
Specifications for any other reference to a paragraph of the Standard Specifications.
DIVISION I GENERAL PROVISIONS
1 GENERAL
Add to Section 1-1.01 GENERAL:
The work must be done in compliance with the City of San Luis Obispo, Department of
Public Works:
1. South Hills Radio Site Upgrades Project Special Provisions
2. City of San Luis Obispo Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards – 2018
edition
3. State of California, Department of Transportation Standard Specifications and
Standard Plans – 2015 edition
In case of conflict between documents, governing ranking must comply with section 5-1.02
of the City of San Luis Obispo’s Standard Specifications.
Failure to comply with the provisions of these sections is a material breach of contract:
1. Sections 5 through 8 of the Standard Specifications
2. Section 12 through 15 of the Standard Specifications
3. Section 77-1 of the Standard Specifications
4. Section 81 of the Standard Specifications
5. authorized working hours
6. OSHA compliance
2 BIDDING
Replace Section 2-1.33A BID DOCUMENT COMPLETION AND SUBMITTAL, General
with:
Furnish bid using blank forms provided in the Special Provisions. Bid must include all
forms and must be signed by the bidder.
3 CONTRACT AWARD AND EXECUTION
4 SCOPE OF WORK
Add to Section 4-1.03 WORK DESCRIPTION:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
11
Comply with the provisions of Sections XX, XX, and XX for general, material, construction,
and payment specifics.
5 CONTROL OF WORK
6 CONTROL OF MATERIALS
7 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC
Add to Section 7-1.03B PUBLIC CONVENIENCE, Traffic Control Plan
Provide traffic control plan and traffic control application at or before the preconstruction
meeting. Traffic control plan must be drawn to scale. Traffic control application may be
obtained on the City’s website:
www.slocity.org/government/department-directory/public-works/documents-
online/construction-documents
Upon approval of the traffic control plan, the City will issue a no-fee Encroachment Permit.
Permittee is responsible to comply with all conditions of the traffic control plan. Complete
work using due diligence to restore free flowing of traffic.
8 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
Replace the 1st paragraph in Section 8-1.02A SCHEDULE, General with:
Provide a Level 1 schedule for this work.
DIVISION II GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
13 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
15 EXISTING FACILITIES
16 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
DIVISION III EARTHWORK AND LANDSCAPE
19 EARTHWORK
20 LANDSCAPE
21 EROSION CONTROL
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
12
DIVISION V SURFACINGS AND PAVEMENTS
36 GENERAL
37 BITUMINOUS SEALS
38 RESERVED
39 ASPHALT CONCRETE
40 CONCRETE PAVEMENT
41 EXISTING CONCRETE PAVEMENT
42 GROOVE AND GRIND CONCRETE
43–44 RESERVED
DIVISION VI STRUCTURES
46 GROUND ANCHORS AND SOIL NAILS
51 CONCRETE STRUCTURES
55 STEEL STRUCTURES
60 EXISTING STRUCTURES
DIVISION VIII MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION
77 LOCAL INFRASTRUCTURE
78 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION
80 FENCES
DIVISION X ELECTRICAL WORK
86–88 RESERVED
DIVISION XII BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
99 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
Add Section 99-1.01 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS:
SECTION 01045 EXISTING FACILITIES
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. This section describes the procedures for locating, protecting, and
relocating existing underground utilities, surface improvements, and
requirements to connect to existing facilities.
B. Do not perform work that would affect any oil, gas, sewer, or water pipeline;
any telephone, telegraph, or electric transmission line; any fence; or any
other structure, prior to providing the owner of the improvement due notice
of the beginning of work, and remove, shore, support, or otherwise protect
such pipeline, transmission line, ditch, fence, or structure, or replace same.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Standard Drawings
B. Standard Specifications 01000, 01045, 01200, 01310, 01330, 01505, 01570,
02140, 02222, 02223, 02511, 02528, 02578, 03000, 03482, 09902, 09910,
and Division 15.
1.03 CONDITION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
Neither the City nor the Design Engineers warrant the condition, size, material, and
location of existing facilities.
1.04 EXISTING FACILITY LOCATION
The contractor shall be responsible for verifying in advance the location of all
existing pipelines and subsurface utilities and structures as marked by (USA)
Underground Services Alert as shown on the plans. Discrepancies shall be
reported to the project engineer, prior to the fabrication of, or purchase of material
and construction affected by the discrepancy.
1.05 EXISTING FACILITY DOCUMENTATION
A. After the Notice to Proceed issued and before Work at site is started,
Contractor and City shall make thorough examination of pre-existing
conditions including existing buildings, structures, pipelines, roadways, and
other improvements in vicinity of Work, as applicable, which might be
impacted or potentially damaged by construction operations.
B. Contractor shall take photographs and videotape to document preexisting
conditions prior to the start of the work. Include public roads and
improvements to adjacent private property as part of preexisting condition
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
14
documentation. Three sets of dated photographs and three copies of the
dated video provided on DVD shall be submitted to the City prior to the
beginning of construction. The City will review, sign, and return one record
copy to Contractor to be kept on file in Contractor's field office as site
records.
C. These photographs and videotapes are intended for use as indisputable
evidence in ascertaining whether and to what extent damage occurred as a
result of Contractor's operations, and is for protection of Contractor and City.
D. The Contractor shall notify property owners adjacent to the site and property
owners located on streets that will be closed or restricted by the Work.
Notification shall be in the form of a letter, reviewed and approved by City
and delivered a minimum of 15 days before construction is scheduled to
commence. The Contractor shall be available to attend one community
meeting to answer public questions regarding the project if requested to do
so. The meeting time, date and location will be provided by City for inclusion
in the notification letter.
1.06 UTILITY VERIFICATION
A. Existing utilities have been identified and located on the Plans based on
available information, including above ground utility evidence, mapping
provided by utility agencies, and potholing during design of the project. In
general, the subsurface utility engineering was complete per ASCE 38-02,
Quality Level C. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the
location of all existing utilities within the entire pipe trench of the new water
main. The necessary verification for existing utilities shall commence prior
to constructing the new water main.
B. The Contractor shall contact all utility owners a minimum of 72 hours in
advance of any excavations to verify existing utilities and substructures.
Utility verification may result in modification of the pipeline alignment or
profile to avoid conflict with existing utilities that are found to be in a different
location than shown on the Drawings. Minor modifications involving no
increase in pipe length, number of fittings, or appurtenances shall be made
at no additional cost to the City.
C. Delays resulting from discoveries during potholing shall not justify additional
time and monetary compensation to the Contractor.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
15
D. The Contractor shall perform exploratory excavations within the new water
main pipe trench to determine the actual location, depth and required listed
information in 1.06.E all utilities parallel and crossing the new water main.
In the event it is required to deepen the pipe trench to lower the new water
main to avoid obstructions, the contractor shall be required to verify for all
utilities within the required depth of the revised pipe trench. The Contractor
shall conduct exploratory excavations a minimum of two days prior to
pipeline installation to provide sufficient lead time to resolve utility conflicts.
Utilities that were potholed will be provided to the Contractor. The
Contractor may perform additional utility verification at his discretion to
ensure safety and progress of the work at no additional cost to the City.
E. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the following information for
the existing utilities or substructures within the pipe trench of the new
pipeline:
1. Horizontal location as measured from two existing features shown on
the Drawings
2. Depth to the top and bottom of utility from ground surface
3. Size (diameter, width, and depth)
4. Roundness of pipe
5. Circumference
6. Width
7. Material
8. Type of utility
9. Pipeline station where the conflict is located
F. Exploratory excavations shall be backfilled with one sack cement slurry and
patched to match existing pavement profile and reopened to traffic as soon
as practicable after the data is obtained. If the excavation is located within
an area to be resurfaced as part of the pipeline installation, the surface
course of the pothole shall be temporarily patched with cold mix AC which
shall be removed before the final pavement patch is installed.
1.07 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
A. The Contractor's attention is directed to the possible existence of pipe and
other underground improvements that may or may not be shown on the
Approved Plans. Once discovered, the Contractor shall preserve and
protect all such improvements whether shown on the Approved Plans or
not. The Contractor shall provide and install suitable safeguards, and shall
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
16
be responsible for the care and protection of all existing utilities and
substructures including but not limited to: sewer and water pipe (including
laterals and services), electrical and telephone conduits, gas mains and
service lines, oil mains culverts, or other above-ground or below-ground
facilities or structures which may be encountered in or near the area of work.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify USA and each agency
of jurisdiction and utility company and to make arrangements for location of
facilities prior to beginning construction. In the event of damage to existing
facilities during the progress of the work, such facilities shall be replaced or
restored to original condition, as determined by City, at the Contractor’s
expense.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining in advance the location,
elevation, alignment and pipe type and size of all existing pipelines to which
connections are to be made (reference Section 1.05.F). Potholing to
determine location will be allowed only after providing the City with three (3)
day's advance notice. The contractor is required to contact Underground
Service Alert (USA) at 1-800-227-2600 or 1-800-422-4133 for mark-out of
all utilities in the area of the work.
C. If the Contractor, either before commencing work or during the course of
the work, finds any discrepancy between specifications or drawings and the
physical conditions at the site of the work, Contractor shall promptly notify
the City in writing of such discrepancy.
D. The Contractor is to prepare a support plan for each utility crossing detailing
the intended support method. The Contractor is responsible to provide
shoring, underpinning, and structural support for existing utility lines and
structures that become suspended or otherwise unsupported because of
adjacent excavation operations. Contractor must obtain approval from the
owner of the utility prior to excavation of the utility.
1.08 PROTECTION OF LANDSCAPING
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all trees, shrubs,
fences, and other landscape items adjacent to or within the work area,
unless specific removals are indicated on the Approved Plans.
B. In the event of damage to landscape items, including the thickness of
topsoil, the Contractor shall replace the damaged items in kind, in a manner
satisfactory to the City.
C. When pipelines are proposed within planted or otherwise improved areas in
public or private easements, the Contractor shall restore such areas to
original condition after completion of the work.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
17
D. When pipelines are proposed within unimproved areas, the ground surface
shall be dressed smooth to the contour of the original ground and left in a
neat, presentable condition, free of cleared vegetation, rubbish and other
construction wastes. Rocks and clumps that cannot be readily covered by
spreading shall be hauled away and disposed of by the Contractor.
E. Unimproved areas disturbed during construction of the pipeline shall be
hydro seeded in accordance with these Standard Specifications.
1.09 PUBLIC UTILITY RELOCATION
A. In case it should be necessary to relocate or temporarily maintain the
property of any public utility or any other property, and it is understood that
the cost of such relocation or temporary maintenance is not required to be
borne by the owner of the utility or property, the Contractor shall bear all
expenses incidental to the removal or temporary maintenance of such
property in a manner satisfactory to said owner. It is understood that in such
cases, the utility or property owner has the option of doing such work with
his or her own forces, or permitting the work to be performed by the
Contractor.
B. The right is reserved to the State, County, City, and utility owners to enter
at any time upon any street, alley, right of way or easement for the purpose
of making changes for maintenance or repairs to their property necessitated
by the Contractor's work.
1.10 PERMITS
All work shall conform to the specifications and requirements of the State of
California Department of Transportation, the County, the City having jurisdiction,
and all other affected agencies involved. The Contractor shall obtain and keep a
copy of all the required permits in the job site and comply with all the terms and
conditions of said permits. Permits shall also include any related to the
abandonment of an existing water or sewer pipe.
PART 2 MATERIALS
All materials used in making the connection or removing the facility from service
shall conform to the applicable sections of the project specifications and the
Approved Materials List.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL CUT IN CONNECTION INFORMATION
Unless otherwise indicated on the Approved Plans or specifically directed by the
City Engineer, all connections to existing facilities, cut-in installations, shall be
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
18
performed by Contractor. All types of connections to existing water facilities shall
be performed in strict accordance with the following procedures.
A. The contractor shall submit a connection plan developed for all connections
(including multiple connections) to the City’s water system. The connection
plan is to be prepared with the intent of minimizing service interruptions to
City customers. The connection plan will be reviewed and approved by the
City prior to proceeding with any work.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the required fittings, valves, and all other
materials per the Approved Plans as called for in the Standard
Specifications in accordance with the Approved Materials List. The
Contractor shall provide all equipment and labor required for the excavation
and installation of the connection including but not limited to thrust blocks,
thrust restraints, lights, and barricades, backfill and pavement replacement.
In certain circumstances the Contractor may be required to provide
temporary piping (high lining) as part of the equipment for making the
connections. In addition, the Contractor shall assist the City in alleviating
any hardship incurred during a shutdown for connections. Emergency
standby equipment or materials may be required of the Contractor by the
City Engineer.
3.02 FIELD VERIFICATION OF CUT IN CONNECTION
A. Prior to construction, Contractor shall pothole or excavate the existing pipe
at the location of the proposed connection. The City Engineer shall inspect
the pothole/excavation prior to Contractor’s repair of trench. Contractor
shall record the following information on as-built drawings:
1. Pipe size, outside diameter.
2. Pipe Roundness
3. Pipe type such as ACP, PVC, Ductile-Iron or Steel.
4. Pipe class and/or pressure rating.
5. Elevation, grade, and alignment.
6. Location of collars, pipe bells, fittings or couplings, if found.
7. Potential conflicts with existing utilities.
B. The recorded information shall be used by the Contractor to verify the
materials submitted during the shop drawing submittal phase of the project
are of the proper size and application. Contractor is responsible for verifying
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
19
and demonstrating the approved materials for the connection are adequate
and within product manufacturer tolerances and recommendations. This
verification will be presented to the City in form of a new and separate
submittal. Should the approved materials be determined inadequate by the
City Engineer the Contractor shall submit new materials for review and
approval.
3.03 SYSTEM SHUTDOWN
A. Prior to cutting an existing pipe the Contractor shall schedule a meeting
with the City to discuss the connection plan (Section 3.01.A) and
schedule any required shutdown of the existing water system.
Shutdowns may be required at times other than normal working hours to
cause the least amount of inconvenience to customers and to avoid the
use of temporary by-pass piping. Therefore, this should be considered in
determining the bid price for the work.
The Contractor shall refer to water system atlas maps and be responsible
for identifying shutdown valves and the respective water main lengths
affected by the shutdown. Water main lengths provide the Contractor with
estimate water volumes to be properly disposed of per GENERAL
CONDITIONS Article 3.24.3, 3.24.4 and 3.24.5.
1. Shutdowns will be scheduled at the convenience of the City. In
general, shutdowns shall not be scheduled for Mondays or Fridays or
within two days of a nationally-observed holiday. Shutdowns may be
scheduled for nights or weekends if required.
2. The Contractor shall give the City a minimum of five (5) calendar days
and one (1) calendar days’ notice prior to any proposed excavation or
shutdown of existing mains or services. Scheduling shall be subject to
approval by the Construction Manager. Shutdowns cannot be
scheduled on Mondays, Fridays, or the day after a holiday.
3. The City may postpone or reschedule any shutdown operation if, for
any reason, the City Engineer believes that the Contractor is not
prepared with competent personnel, equipment, or materials to
proceed with the connection.
4. The Contractor shall provide line stopping techniques to minimize
customer services interruption where indicated. Line stopping shall be
performed by a firm with a minimum of five years’ line stopping
experience. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the
Traffic Control Plans per the City’s requirements and their
implementation for all line stopping. Traffic Control Plans must be
reviewed and approved by the City of Santa Monica Traffic Division.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for providing engineering for
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
20
all thrust restraint required for line stopping operation. Actual line
stopping locations and sizes are dependent on field conditions and
valve operations and are subject to change. No extra compensation
will be provided for location changes and this should be considered in
determining the bid price for the work.
B. The City will perform the initial and subsequent valve operations to isolate
the mains affected. However, the Contractor shall notify the City not less
than three (3) working days in advance of when such service is desired.
During the course of system shutdown if a valve becomes inoperable or will
not fully close, the Contractor shall allow the City adequate time for the
emergency repairs that may be necessary. If the existing valves cannot be
operated, Contractor shall meet with the City to determine if valves must be
replaced or if plugs (line stops) can be used for the Work. The City will make
a concerted effort to make the repairs in a timely manner. The City will
recharge the system after completion of work.
C. The Contractor is responsible for confirming that system shutdowns result
in isolation of the mains affected and that pressure in the affected mains
has been properly released.
D. The Contractor shall not be entitled to compensation for delays or
rescheduling of work that may arise due to problems the City may encounter
with existing valves while attempting to isolate a section(s) of pipe during
the shutdown. This includes the scheduled day for shutdown as well as the
time that it takes for the City to repair or replace the inoperable valves. The
Contractor may, however, be entitled to an extension of contract completion
time because of the delay, as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor
will be encouraged to work on other areas of the project so as not to disrupt
their work.
3.04 NOTIFICATION OF CUSTOMERS
A. The Contractor shall notify all water customers/consumers 72 hours in
advance prior to disrupting their water service. The Contractor will furnish
and distribute City approved door-knob handout cards for distribution to
customers affected by shutdowns. The Contractor shall also verbally inform
customers affected by shutdowns. Water service disruption includes but is
not limited to those times when:
1. The customer’s water service is switched over to the temporary
by- pass piping;
2. The main is first shut down after the temporary by-pass piping has
become fully operational;
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
21
3. The customer’s water service is switched back to the main from the
temporary by-pass;
4. Water mains are shut down for cut-ins; and
5. Any other situation that cause the water service to be disrupted.
3.05 CONNECTION TO EXISTING FACILITIES
A. Contractor may proceed with excavation only when the all proceeding
procedures (all utility verification, system shutdown and customer notifications)
have been completed, materials have been approved and delivered, and a
copy of the approved traffic control plan (if not included in the Approved Plans)
has been supplied to the City Engineer.
1. The Contractor shall saw-cut pavement, excavate and provide and
install shoring and steel plating, when necessary, one day prior to the
cut-in installation.
2. The Contractor shall provide lights, barricades and traffic control
devices in accordance with the City’s Representative and as deemed
necessary for the excavation by the City Engineer.
3. The Contractor shall de-water existing mains in full compliance with
NPDES standards where cut-in installations are required and shall be
done in the presence of the Engineer and in accordance with Section
02223. The Contractor shall be prepared to deal with leaking valves
and water from those valves to complete the shutdown. Only City
personnel are authorized to operate existing valves. The Contractor
shall be responsible for any and all damage resulting from
unauthorized operation of existing City facilities.
4. In areas where cut-ins are to be performed the Contractor shall line
the bottom of the trench with 300 to 450mm (12” to 18”) of 19mm (¾”)
rock and install a 300 to 400mm (12” to 16”) deep sump for dewatering
the trench bottom.
5. To facilitate the proposed connection and allow for slight adjustments
in alignment, the Contractor shall leave a minimum 3.0m (10’) gap
between the new pipe installation and the proposed connection point
at the existing water main. The Contractor shall leave a gap longer
than 3.0m (10’) if conditions warrant, or if directed by the City Engineer.
6. Connections shall be made with as little change as possible in the
grade of the new main. If the grade of the existing pipe is below that of
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
22
the new pipeline, a sufficient length of the new line shall be deepened
so as to prevent the creation of any high spot or abrupt changes in
grade of the new line. Where the grade of the existing pipe is above
that of the new pipeline, the new line shall be laid at specified depth,
except for the first joint adjacent to the connection, which shall be
deflected within 75% of the allowances of the pipe manufacturer as
necessary to meet the grade of the existing pipe. If sufficient change
in direction cannot be obtained by the limited deflection of the first joint,
a fitting of the proper angle shall be installed. Where the connection
creates a high or low spot in the line, a standard air release or blow off
assembly shall be installed as directed by the City Engineer.
7. Where connections are made to existing valves, the contractor shall
furnish and install all temporary blocking, steel clamps, shackles, and
anchors as required by the City, and he shall replace the valve riser
box and cover and adjust the valve cover to the proper grade in
accordance with these specifications. The City will operate all existing
valves. All valves, existing or newly installed, shall be readily
accessible at all times to the City for emergency operation.
8. After the Contractor has performed the cut-in operations, and the City
Engineer has given approval to proceed, the Contractor shall complete
the installation as shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with
the Standard Specifications including, but not limited to:
a. Disinfecting and installing the pipe section(s) necessary to make
the closure to the new system. New pipelines shall not be
connected to existing facilities until new pipelines have been
successfully tested and disinfected and accepted by the City.
b. Installing and setting the valve gate well(s) in accordance with the
Standard Drawings.
c. Installing thrust and anchor blocks in accordance with Section
03000.
d. Completing all backfill and compaction of the trench in accordance
with Section 02223.
e. Repairing or replacing pavement as necessary in accordance with
agency of jurisdiction requirements.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF TEMPORARY END CAPS TO MAINTAIN SERVICE
Before excavating for new mains that are to replace existing pipes or services, it
may be necessary to install temporary or permanent end caps or blind flanges on
existing pipes that are later to be abandoned or connected to in order to maintain
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
23
service to customers or fire protection during construction. When indicated on the
Approved Plans or when directed by the City Engineer, Contractor shall install and
maintain such temporary end caps as indicated below and in accordance with the
Standard Drawings.
A. For existing water mains 350mm (14”) or less in diameter, the existing pipe
shall be cut cleanly and fitted with a rubber-gasketed ductile-iron solid end cap
specifically designed for the size and type of pipe being temporarily capped.
The temporary end cap shall be adequately braced with a concrete thrust block
poured against undisturbed material or as otherwise required to insure that no
movement or leakage occurs.
B. Temporary end caps shall be fitted with 50mm (2”) tapped outlets in
accordance with the Standard Drawings to provide temporary 50mm (2”)
blowoffs or connections to temporary water sources if indicated on the
Approved Drawings or if directed by the City Engineer.
C. Existing pipes 400mm (16”) or larger shall not be fitted with temporary end
caps.
3.07 UTILITIES CROSSING WATER, RECYCLED WATER OR SEWER
FACILITIES
Wherever new utilities cross under or over water, recycled water or sewer facilities,
the minimum vertical separation shall be 300mm (12”) unless otherwise approved
by the City Engineer. The new pipeline shall be restrained in accordance with the
Approved Plans. All new utilities crossing under or over water, recycled water or
sewer facilities shall remain exposed until inspected and approved by the City’s
Representative. Wherever new utilities cross under or over water, recycled water
or sewer facilities, backfill and compaction within the limits of the water, recycled
water, or sewer facility trench width shall be in strict conformance with the backfill
and compaction requirements specified herein.
3.08 HORIZONTAL SEPARATION OF UTILITIES PARALLELING
WATER, RECYCLED WATER OR SEWER FACILITIES
Wherever new utilities parallel water, storm drain, recycled water or sewer
facilities, the minimum horizontal separation shall be per the California Department
of Health Services separation requirements unless otherwise approved by the
City’s Representative.
3.09 REMOVAL FROM SERVICE OF EXISTING MAINS AND APPURTENANCES
A. Existing mains and appurtenances shall be removed from service at the
locations shown on the plans or as directed by the engineer.
B. Existing pipe and appurtenances removed from the ground will require
backfill and repair of surface in accordance with Section 02223.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
24
C. Removed pipe and appurtenances shall be temporarily stockpiled on the job
in a location that will not disrupt traffic or be a safety hazard, disposed of in a
proper manner (as determined by the City Engineer). The contractor shall
remove and dispose of all removed pipe at his own expense to a landfill permitted
to accept such materials.
D. Before excavating for installing mains that are to replace existing pipes
and/or services, the contractor shall make proper provisions for the
maintenance and continuation of service as directed by the City Engineer
unless otherwise specified.
E. If the meter box is to be removed from an abandoned water service, the
service line is to be removed and the corporation stop closed and capped. If
there is no corporation stop on the service, the adapter is to be removed and a
brass plug is to be installed in the service saddle.
F. Asbestos Cement Pipe (ACP) shall be cut, removed and disposed of in a
proper manner. The contractor shall be responsible for the proper
manifesting of any and all ACP at an authorized disposal site.
3.10 CUTTING AND RESTORING STREET SURFACING
A. In cutting or breaking up street surfacing, the contractor shall not use
equipment that will damage adjacent pavement.
B. All asphalt and/or Portland cement concrete surfaces shall be scored with
sawing equipment of a type meeting the approval of the City; providing
however, that any cement concrete base under an asphaltic mix surface will not
be required to be scored by sawing. Existing paving surfaces shall be saw cut
back beyond the edges of the trenches to form neat square cuts before
repaving is commenced.
C. The Contractor is required to visit all project locations prior to bid. City
records indicate that the existing structural sections vary as follows:
Roadway Description Estimated Structural Section
PCC Concrete Pavement 12” +/-
AC Pavement 3” + 1” over four-inch aggregate base + 1”
The Contractor will be provided additional pavement information once it
becomes available.
D. Pavement, sidewalks, curbs, or gutters removed or destroyed in connection with
performance of the work shall be saw cut to the nearest score marks, if any,
and shall be replaced with pavement sidewalks, curbs, or gutters of the same
kind, or better by the contractor in accordance with the latest
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
25
specifications, rules, and regulations and subject to the inspection of the agency
having jurisdiction over the street or highway.
E. One sack cement slurry base shall be placed beneath the restored pavement
to the thickness required by the agency having to allow the restoration of
the pavement.
3.11 MAINTENANCE, REMOVAL, AND RECONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES
AND OTHER FACILITIES
A. Insofar as practicable during the progress of the work, no pipeline, conduit,
sewer, culvert, storm drain, drainage channel, pole line, street lighting
system, overhead wires or cables, or underground wires or cables, either
main line structures or laterals and services, or any other structure or facility,
shall be disturbed, but all shall be supported and protected against injury
and maintained by the Contractor in good operating condition. In no case
shall any such property be disturbed or removed without the approval of the
Engineer as hereinafter provided. The Contractor shall be responsible for
and make good all damage due to his/her operations and the provisions of
this section shall not be abated even in the event such damage occurs after
backfilling or is not discovered until after completion of backfilling.
B. All affected traffic signal materials or equipment as a result of this
improvement shall be restored or replaced by the Contractor at no cost to
the City. This includes pull boxes, inductive loop detectors, detectors, lead-
in wire, and interconnect cable, etc.
C. Where a pipe fitting or portion of the pipe is to be removed near a valve,
and the valve is to be left in place as a stop against main pressure, the valve
shall be tied back by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any
damage which might result to the City’s property as a result of a main break
caused by inadequate restraint of the valve will be charged to the
Contractor.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
26
SECTION 01110 SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Identification and summary description of the Project,
the Work, location, OWNER-furnished products, activities by others,
coordination, and early occupancy by OWNER.
1.2 THE WORK [THE PROJECT]
PART 2 PROJECT SCOPE
A. The South Hills radio site in the City of San Luis Obispo (City) is a critical
facility for the ongoing operations of the City’s safety response teams. The
facility is in significant need of repair as the structure is failing due to water
damage, and this is causing a risk of structural instability. Additionally,
the existing generator is undersized to power the existing equipment,
which could be problematic during a utility power failure.
Hence, this project will consist of the removal and replacement of the
existing radio shelter, generator, and will include a new prefabricated
structure (11’6” x 20’) to enclose and protect the existing radio and network
equipment. The new structure will include two built-in wall AC units to
properly cool the equipment and control standing temperature. A new
diesel generator is sized to power the facility in case of emergency or loss
of utility power.
The contractor shall remove the existing radio equipment racks from the
existing building and install them in the new building. The contractor shall
remove existing radio antennas from the existing building and install
them on the new tower. The contractor shall install new antenna cables
from the antennas to the radio equipment inside the building via the new
cable tray. The contractor will also be responsible for re-tuning the radio
equipment.
A new 100-foot radio tower is to be constructed to boost signal
reception and transmission at the site and provide necessary coverage
throughout the City. Cable routing over the cable tray is shown on the
plans between the tower and the building. There is an existing GIS
antenna attached to the existing structure that needs to re-located to the
proposed location in the plans. The existing fencing is to be replaced to
the satisfaction of the City (this is included on the site plan and details).
A new gate is to be installed per the plans
B. Except as specifically noted otherwise, provide and pay for:
1. Insurance and bonds.
2. Labor, materials, and equipment including shipping to site.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
27
3. Tools, equipment, and machinery required for construction.
4. Utilities required for construction.
5. Temporary facilities to keep the site in operation during
construction and changeover.
6. Dust control measures.
C. Contractor to secure and pay for all the permits including the permit to
construct and operate the generator.
2.2 LOCATION OF PROJECT
A. The Work is located at 2877 S Higuera St, San Luis Obispo, CA 93401.
Nearest site access entrance location is 3193-3175 Cherry Ln, San Luis
Obispo, CA 93401.
2.3 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
A. OWNER will:
1.Arrange for and deliver necessary shop drawings, product data, and
samples to CONTRACTOR.
2.Arrange and pay for product delivery to site in accordance with
construction schedule.
3.Deliver supplier's bill of materials to
CONTRACTOR. 4. Inspect deliveries jointly with
CONTRACTOR.
5. Submit claims for transportation damage.
6. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items.
7. Arrange for manufacturer's warranties, bonds, service, and inspections.
B.CONTRACTOR's responsibility for OWNER-furnished products:
1.Designating delivery date for each OWNER-furnished
product. 2. Reviewing shop drawings, product data, and
samples.
3. Submitting notification of discrepancies or anticipated
problems. 4. Receiving and unloading products at site.
5. Promptly inspecting products jointly with OWNER and recording
shortages, and damaged or defective items.
6. Handling products at site, including uncrating and
storage. 7. Protecting products from damage.
8. Installing, including assembly, connections, adjustments, tests,
and finish products in accordance with Contract Documents.
9. Providing operating oils, lubricants, and incidental materials
required for complete installation.
10. Repairing or replacing items damaged after receipt until date of
Substantial Completion of the Work by OWNER.
C. When OWNER fails to deliver products in accordance with approved
Construction Schedule, adjustments will be made to Contract Times
and Contract Price as stipulated in General Conditions.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
28
2.4 ACTIVITIES BY OTHERS
A. OWNER, utilities, and others may perform activities within Project area
while the Work is in progress.
1. Schedule the Work with OWNER, utilities, and others to minimize
mutual interference.
B. Cooperate with others to minimize interference and delays.
1. When cooperation fails, submit recommendations and perform
Work in coordination with work of others.
2.5 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Maintain overall coordination of the Work.
B. Obtain construction schedules from each subcontractor, and
require each subcontractor to maintain schedules and coordinate
modifications.
PART 3 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 4 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
29
SECTION 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements for sequencing and scheduling the Work
affected by existing site and facility, work restrictions, and coordination between
construction operations and plant operations.
B. Related sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is
as binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities
performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR’s Work.
3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section.
This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not
intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR to
see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Section 01110 - Summary of Work.
b. Section 01352 - Alteration Project Procedures.
c. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
1.2 GENERAL CONSTRAINTS ON SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. South Hills Radio Tower Project:
1. The South Hills radio site in the City of San Luis Obispo (City) is a critical
facility for the ongoing operations of the City’s safety response teams.
2. Conduct work in a manner that will not impair the operational capabilities of
essential elements of the site.
3. The status of the South Hills Radio Tower project shall be defined as
“operational” when it is capable of providing the communications for public
safety radio and operations.
B. Work sequence and constraints:
1. Utilize description of critical events in work sequence in this Section as a
guideline for scheduling and undertaking the Work.
2. Work sequence and constraints presented do not include all items affecting
completion of the Work, but are intended to describe critical events
necessary to minimize disruption of the existing facilities and to ensure no
interruption of service operations of City’s safety response teams.
1.3 SHUTDOWN AND CONSTRUCTION CONSTRAINTS
A. Execute the Work while the existing facility is in operation.
B. No power outage or complete shutdown of power to site is acceptable. The only
acceptable down time for the radio equipment is during the transition of
equipment from old to new building. It is the contractor’s responsibility to keep a
temporary generator in service and maintained at all times during the
construction phase of the project. Indicate required shutdowns of existing
facilities or interruptions of existing operations on Progress Schedule. Shutdowns
will be permitted to the extent that existing operation of the plant will not be
jeopardized and identified constraints are satisfied.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
30
1.4 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE ACCESS
A. Provide safe, continuous access to radio equipment for City personnel.
1.5 UTILITIES
A. Provide advance notice to and utilize services of Undergound Services Alert
(U.S.A.) for location and marking of underground utilities operated by utility
agencies other than the OWNER.
B. Contractor to coordinate with the utility to locate the existing conduit and cable
routing.
C. Contractor is responsible to intercept the existing utility conduit and install new
conduit to the proposed location as shown in the plans. Contractor to coordinate
with utility planner or representative, to pull the new wires from the transformer to
the new meter, install the meter and energize the new service.
1.6 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Maintain overall coordination of the Work.
B. Obtain construction schedules from subcontractors and suppliers, and assume
responsibility for correctness.
C. Incorporate schedules from subcontractors and suppliers into Progress
Schedule to plan for and comply with sequencing constraints.
D. Contractors responsibilities:
1. Contractor to hire the sub-contractor who meets the qualifications for
relocating the radio equipment from the existing building to the new building,
and for tuning and programming said equipment.
2. Contractor to coordinate with the sub-contractor who is hired for the
relocation of existing equipment and city to determine the acceptable
downtime.
3. Contractor to coordinate with the tower, building and generator provider to
deliver the equipment to the job site. The entrance to the site is through a
residential neighborhood. The contractor shall not offload equipment in the
neighborhood to transfer to the site. The equipment shall be delivered
through the residential neighborhood and straight to the site.
4. Site access entrance is an active construction area; Contractor to work with
the off-site contractor for best maneuvering of equipment to the job site.
1.7 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Where proper execution of the Work depends upon work by others, inspect and
promptly report discrepancies and defects.
B. Site access entrance is an active construction site; it is contractor’s responsibility
to coordinate with the offsite contractor to determine the best access.
Qualifications for sub-contractor to relocate the radio equipment from the
existing building to the new building, and to tune and program the radio
equipment, the following qualifications are to be met:
1. Company name XXXXX or equal
2. Certificates XXXX
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
31
3. Experience XXXXX
4. XXXXX
1.8 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Contractor shall execute the project by following the sequence of the work as
stated below. The following project sequence is recommended so if the
contractor deems a different sequence of work would be more effective to keep
the site operational, the contractor shall submit their proposed sequence of work
to the engineer and city for review.
1. Demolish the existing fence
2. Provide temporary generator on site, 50kW (minimum), 120/240V Single
Phase 60Hz.
3. Coordinate with the utility planner or representative to de-energize the
power to the service transformer.
4. Remove the power wires terminated on the existing ATS from the existing
generator and install the temporary generator wiring (wires as specified by
temporary generator manufacturer).
5. Demolish the existing generator and associated fuel tank and their
foundations.
6. Turn the temporary generator “on” and manually transfer the power from
utility to temp generator at the ATS. At this point building loads will be
connected to the temporary generator.
7. Perform the ground work (trenching and digging) for the site
a. Locate the existing utility power conduit and wiring route to the existing
building. Stake the intercepting point for the conduit routing to the new
building.
b. Locate the existing communications conduit and wiring route to the
existing building. Stake the intercepting point for the conduit routing to
the new building.
1) Be carefully to install the temporary communications or secure
these cables from damage due to the construction activities.
8. Install the foundations for the new radio tower, new building, new cable tray
support foundation, and the GPS antenna foundation.
a. Complete the concrete inspection performed by deputy.
9. Install the new conduits and back fill the trench with the materials as
mentioned in the plans for the power and communication wiring to the new
building.
10. Install the new building.
a. Install the new ATS (Automatic Transfer Switch) and PG&E metering
cabinet as shown in the plans
b. Install the wiring between the meter and ATS, ATS and LP- Lighting
Panel inside the building as shown in the plans.
11. Install the tower frame.
12. Install the new GPS antenna
13. Install the cable tray between the tower and the building.
14. Coordinate with utility planner or representative to route new wires from the
service transformer to the new metering cabinet and install the new PG&E
meter, and energize the power to the new meter.
15. Relocation of existing radio equipment:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
32
a. Coordinate this work with the city before commencing and determine the length of
the down time.
b. Install the antennas on the new tower.
c. Relocate the radio equipment from the existing building to the new building
d. Install the wiring from the antennas to the new building and associated radio
equipment.
e. Program and tune the radio equipment to restore to the previously operational
and functional conditions.
f. Verify with city personnel that all equipment from the existing building has been
relocated to the new building and the safety response radio system is functioning
properly.
16. Remove the temporary generator wiring from the existing ATS and terminate on the
new ATS. The new building loads will be fed from the utility source but the
temporary generator will be used as the backup generator until the permanent
generator is installed.
17. Demolish the existing building and foundations.
18. Install the conduit runs between the new generator and the new ATS, and the new
generator and the new building, as shown in the plans.
19. Install concrete foundations as per the plans for the new generator
20. Install the new generator and associated wiring per the plans.
21. Perform the testing on the generator as mentioned in the generator spec.
22. Remove the wiring in new ATS from the temporary generator and install the wiring
from the new generator.
1.9 TEMPORARY SERVICES, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT
A. As specified in Section 01500.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
33
SECTION 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes specifications for measurement and payment as they apply to
the Work, and includes provisions applicable to lump sum prices, unit prices,
and allowances, as indicated.
B. Measurement methods specified in the individual Sections of these Specifications
shall govern if they differ from methods specified in this Section.
1.2 LUMP-SUM MEASUREMENT
A. Lump-sum measurement will be for the entire item, unit of work, structure, or
combination thereof, as specified and as indicated in the Bid Schedule of the Bid
Form.
1. If the Contractor requests progress payments for lump-sum items or amounts
in the Bid Schedule, such progress payments will be made in accordance
with a well-balanced, detailed program of payment-apportioning, prepared
by the Contractor and submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Such
payment-apportioning may require modifications during the Contract, as
determined by the City Engineer.
2. Such program for each applicable lump-sum item shall show fixed
definable and measurable quantities where possible and unit prices there for
as developed and assigned by the Contractor to the different features of the
work and major subdivisions thereof. The summation of extensions of
quantities and unit prices and related costs shall equal the amount of the
lump-sum Contract Price or lump sum bid item indicated in the Bid
Schedule.
3. Following the City Engineer’s approval, progress payments will be made in
accordance with the Contractor’s payment-apportioning program and from
the approved progress schedule, reflecting the progress which occurred
during the payment period as approved by the City Engineer.
1.3 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES FOR UNIT PRICES
A. Measurement Standards:
1. All work to be paid for at a Contract price per unit measurement, as indicated
in the Bid Schedule, will be measured by the City Engineer in
accordance with United States Standard Measures.
2. A ton shall consist of 2,000 pounds avoirdupois.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
34
B. Measurement by Weight:
1. Reinforcing steel, steel shapes, castings, miscellaneous metal, metal
fabrications, and similar items to be paid for by weight shall be measured
by scale or by handbook weights for the type and quantity of material actually
furnished and used.
2. Unless shipped by rail, material to be measured and paid for by weight shall be
weighed on sealed scales regularly inspected by the State Division of
Measurement Standards or its designated representative, furnished by and
at the expense of the Contractor. All weighing, measuring, and metering
devices shall be suitable for the purpose intended and shall conform to the
tolerances and specifications as outlined in the California Code of Regulations,
Title 4, Chapter 9, and Division 5.
3. Provide or utilize platform scales of sufficient size and capacity to permit
the entire vehicle or combination of vehicles to rest on the scale platform
while being weighed. Combination vehicles may be weighed as separate units
provided they are disconnected while being weighed. Scales shall be inspected
and certified as often as the City Engineer may deem necessary to ascertain
accuracy. Costs incurred as a result of regulating, adjusting, testing,
inspecting, and certifying scales shall be borne by the Contractor.
4. A licensed weigh master shall weigh all materials weighed on scales
furnished by the Contractor. The City Engineer may be present to witness
the weighing and to check and compile the daily record of such scale
weights. However, in any case, the City Engineer will require that the
Contractor furnish weight slips and daily summary weigh sheets. In such
cases, furnish a duplicate weight slip or a load slip for each vehicle weighed
and deliver the slip to the City Engineer at the point of delivery of the material.
5. If the material is shipped by rail, the certified car weights will be accepted,
provided that only actual weight of material will be paid for and not minimum
car weights used for assessing freight tariff. Car weights will not be
acceptable for material to be passed through mixing plants. Material to be
measured by weight shall be weighed separately for each bid item under which
it is to be paid.
6. Trucks used to haul material being paid for by weight shall be weighed
empty daily and at such additional times as the City Engineer may require.
Each truck shall bear a plainly legible identification mark. The City Engineer
may require the weight of the material verified by weighing empty and loaded
trucks on such other scales as the City Engineer may designate.
C. Measurement by Volume:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
35
1. Measurement by volume will be by the cubic dimension indicated in the Bid
Schedule. Method of volume measurement will be by the unit volume in place or
removed as shown on the Contract Drawings or as specified.
2. When material is to be measured and paid for on a volume basis and it is
impractical to determine the volume by the specified method of measurement,
or when requested by the Contractor in writing and accepted by the City
Engineer in writing, the material may be weighed in accordance with the
requirements specified for weight measurement. Such weights will be
converted to volume measurement for payment purposes. Factors for
conversion from weight measurement to volume measurement will be
determined by the City Engineer and shall be agreed to by the Contractor
before such method of measurement of pay quantities will be accepted.
D. Measurement by Area: Measurement by area will be by the square dimension shown
on the Contract Drawings or as specified. Method of square measurement will be as
specified.
E. Linear Measurement: Linear measurement will be by the linear dimension listed or
indicated in the Bid Schedule. Unless otherwise indicated, items, components, or work
to be measured on a linear basis will be measured at the centerline of the item in place.
F. Field Measurement for Payment:
1. The City Engineer will compute all quantities of work performed by the
Contractor on a unit-price basis, for payment purposes.
2. The Contractor shall assist the City Engineer in the taking of measurements
by providing all equipment, workers, and survey crews as required to
measure quantities. Unless otherwise specified, all quantities shall be
calculated using dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings. No
allowance will be made for specified tolerances.
1.4 VALUES OF UNIT PRICES
A. The number of units and quantities contained in the Bid Schedule as estimated
quantities are approximate only, and final payment will be made for the actual
number of units and quantities which are incorporated in the Work and required
by the Contract, as measured by the City Engineer.
B. In the event that work or materials or equipment are required to be furnished to a
greater or lesser extent than is indicated in the Contract Documents, such work or
materials or equipment shall be furnished in greater or lesser quantities.
1.5 ALLOWANCES
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
36
A. Description: Allowances specified in the Contract Documents and indicated in the
Bid Schedule shall cause the work so covered to be furnished, performed, and
completed for such sums as are acceptable to the City Engineer and shall include
the cost to the Contractor of all materials and equipment to be delivered and
installed under the specified Allowances.
B. Specific Allowances: Specific Allowances, if any, included in the Contract are
specified in Contract Specifications Section 01200, Price and Payment
Procedures, and are indicated in the Bid Schedule.
C. Administration:
1. The Allowances specified in the Contract Specifications and indicated in the
Bid Schedule are exclusive of any work indicated in the Contract
Documents for which payment is included under other specifically designated
items in the Bid Schedule.
2. The Contractor may not proceed with any work under an Allowance, or
receive payment for such work unless directed to do so by the Engineer
using a Change Notice as described in General Conditions Article 7-
Changes. The cost of the work shall either be an amount agreed upon by
the City Engineer and the Contractor, or an amount specified by the City
Engineer that the Contractor may not exceed without further direction from the
City Engineer.
3. Unless compensation for allowance work is agreed upon, a Force Account
Daily Report form shall be used to track and record actual expenditures
and expenses related to each allowance. Authorization for payments to
the Contractor will be based on such Daily Reports and a related
progress schedule. Payment may be made to the Contractor for
amounts authorized by Change Notice, unless the total amount
authorized exceeds the value of the Allowance indicated in the Bid Schedule.
4. Upon Acceptance of the Work, a Change Order will be prepared, reflecting
the exact amount due to the Contractor if different from the exact
amounts stated in the Bid Schedule for the specified Allowances.
1.6 REJECTED, EXCESS, OR WASTED MATERIALS
Quantities of material wasted or disposed of in a manner not called for under the Contract;
rejected loads of material, including material rejected after it has been placed by reasons of
the failure of the Contractor to conform to the provisions of the Contract; material not
unloaded form the transporting vehicle; material placed outside the lines indicated on
the Contract Drawings or established by the City Engineer; or material remaining on
hand after completion of the Work, will not be paid for, and such quantities shall not be
included in the final total quantities. No additional compensation will be permitted for
loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected material.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
37
1.7 BID ITEM MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENTS
BID ITEM 1 – CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION
Payment for this item shall be at the contract lump sum price for construction coordination
acceptably performed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. The lump sum
bid price shall include the cost of mobilization and demobilization of equipment,
materials, shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to be made for worker
protection from the hazard of traffic and caving ground during the excavation of
trenches. Bid Item 1 also includes obtaining of all bonds, insurance, and permits; moving
onto and from the site all materials and equipment; and the furnishing and erecting of
storage yards, temporary buildings, and other construction facilities; and all traffic control;
all as required for the proper performance and completion of the Work.
BID ITEM 2 – STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION MEASURES
Progress payments for Stormwater Pollution Prevention Measures will be computed by
the Engineer based on his estimate of the percentage completion of this item of work.
In general, this will be proportional to the percentage completion of the major items of
work to which stormwater pollution prevention measures are incidental.
Payment for Stormwater Pollution Prevention Measures will be made at the contract
lump sum price for stormwater pollution prevention measures. Such payment will be
considered full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, and equipment for
completion, implementation and compliance with the Sediment and Erosion Control Plan
in the plans.
BID ITEM 3 - REMOVE FENCE AND GATE
Measurement and payment for remove fence and gate will be made at the unit price bid
per linear foot. Payment shall include the cost of, but not limited to, the demolition and
removal of existing fence, posts, barbed wire, concrete and accessories. This bid item
shall include all the necessary labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to do all
the work.
BID ITEM 4 - REMOVE DIESEL FUEL TANK AND FOUNDATION
Payment for this lump sum bid item shall be made on a percent complete basis, based
on the lump sum amount for this item, and includes full compensation for demolition and
salvage in accordance with the Contract Documents including but not limited to:
salvaging equipment and delivery to owner; removal and disposal of concrete, wiring,
conduit, equipment and appurtenances. This bid item shall include all the necessary
labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to do all the work.
BID ITEM 5 - REMOVE GENERATOR AND FOUNDATION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
38
Payment for this lump sum bid item shall be made on a percent complete basis, based
on the lump sum amount for this item, and includes full compensation for demolition and
salvage in accordance with the Contract Documents including but not limited to:
salvaging equipment and delivery to owner; removal and disposal of concrete, wiring,
conduit, equipment and appurtenances. This bid item shall include all the necessary
labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to do all the work.
BID ITEM 6 - REMOVE BUILDING AND FOUNDATION
Payment for this lump sum bid item shall be made on a percent complete basis, based
on the lump sum amount for this item, and includes full compensation for demolition and
salvage in accordance with the Contract Documents including but not limited to:
salvaging equipment and delivery to owner; removal and disposal of concrete, wiring,
conduit, equipment, appurtenances, and demolition of facilities. This bid item shall
include all the necessary labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to do all the
work.
BID ITEM 7 - REMOVE AND/OR RELOCATE MASTS AND ANTENNAS
Measurement for remove and/or relocated masts and antennas will be made per each
mast or antenna removed or relocated in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
The contract unit price paid for this bid item shall include full compensation for furnishing
all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals and for doing all the work.
Payment for this per each bid item includes full compensation for demolition, relocation
and salvage in accordance with the Contract Documents including but not limited to:
salvaging equipment and delivery to owner; removal and disposal of concrete, wiring,
conduit, equipment and appurtenances. This bid item shall include all the necessary
labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to do all the work.
BID ITEM 8 - CLEARING, GRUBBING & STOCKPILE
Payment for clearing, grubbing and stockpile will be at the contract lump sum price in
accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Such payment shall include full
compensation for all labor, materials, tools, and equipment to construct this item of the
work. Items to be relocated and restored shall be removed, preserved and protected; and
when specified, their relocation, restoration, reconstruction, adjustment, etc., in like kind
and to original conditions, is part of this bid item.
All removals from within the limits of work shown on the plans and required protection of
facilities are included in this item regardless of method of relocations, disposal, etc.
Quantities used for the removal of A.C. or P.C.C., the construction of asphaltic concrete
pavement, Portland Cement Concrete pavement, and miscellaneous minor concrete
structures shall be reimbursed under the appropriate bid item when such an item exists.
Such payment shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, and
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
39
equipment to construct this item of the work. Miscellaneous work and materials shall be
considered incidental to this bid item and no additional payment shall be made therefore.
BID ITEM 9 - STRUCTURE EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION
Payment for the structure excavation, backfill and compaction shall be the number of cubic
yards of acceptably excavated (including rock), backfilled and compacted area intended
for structural concrete foundation in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Such
payment will be considered full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, and equipment
for completion, implementation and compliance with the Plans and Specifications.
BID ITEM 10 - DRILLED CONRETE PIERS
Measurement and payment of drilled concrete piers shall per each unit price for drilled
concrete pier installed, and includes full compensation for drilling, rebar cage fabrication
and placement, concrete and anchor bolt placement in accordance with the Plans and
Specifications. Such payment will be considered full compensation for all labor, materials,
tools, and equipment for completion, implementation and compliance with the Plans and
Specifications.
BID ITEM 11 – ELECTRICAL TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION
Payment for electrical trench excavation, backfill and compaction shall be made on
a percent complete basis, based on the lump sum amount for this item, and
includes full compensation for electrical trenchwork. The lump sum cost shall
constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and
equipment necessary for electrical trenchwork in accordance with the Contract
Documents including, but not limited to trench excavation, excavation (including
rock) pipe bedding, trench zone, compaction, erosion control; removal and
disposal of excavated soil not suitable for backfill, dewatering, protection of
existing utilities and conduit. Such payment will be considered full compensation for
all labor, materials, tools, and equipment for completion, implementation and
compliance with the Plans and Specifications.
BID ITEM 12 - STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOUNDATION
Payment for furnishing and installing structural concrete foundation shall be the number
of square feet of acceptably prepared and installed structural concrete foundations in
accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Such payment will be considered full
compensation for all labor, materials, tools, and equipment for completion,
implementation and compliance with the Plans and Specifications.
BID ITEM 13 - EARTHWORK
Payment for earthwork shall be the number of cubic yards of acceptably loosening,
excavating, filling, grading, borrow, hauling, preparing subgrade, compacting in final
location, wetting and drying, and operations pertaining to site grading for the building
and equipment sites, roads, and other facilities. This bid item also includes backfilling
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
40
and compacting under and around structures. Such payment will be considered full
compensation for all labor, materials, tools, and equipment for completion, implementation
and compliance with the Plans and Specifications.
BID ITEM 14 - CLASS II AGGREGATE BASE
Payment for furnishing and installing aggregate base shall be at the contract unit price
cubic yard for acceptably constructed Class 2 Aggregate Base in accordance with
the Plans and Specifications. Such payment shall include full compensation for all
labor, materials, tools and equipment to construct this item of the work.
BID ITEM 15 - GENERATOR
Payment for furnishing and installing the generator shall be made on a percent
complete basis, based on the lump sum amount for this item, and shall include full
compensation for furnishing the labor, materials, tools, and equipment and doing
all the work involved in accordance with the Contract Documents including, but not
limited to procurement, installation, field testing, and proper connecting of
generator.
BID ITEM 16 - STEEL TOWER
Payment for furnishing and installing the steel tower shall be made on a percent
complete basis, based on the lump sum amount for this item, and shall include full
compensation for furnishing the labor, materials, tools, and equipment and doing
all the work involved in accordance with the Contract Documents including, but not
limited to procurement, installation and connecting of steel tower.
BID ITEM 17 - PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING
Payment for furnishing and installing the pre-engineered building shall be made on
a percent complete basis, based on the lump sum amount for this item, and shall
include full compensation for furnishing the labor, materials, tools, and equipment
and doing all the work involved in accordance with the Contract Documents
including, but not limited to procurement, installation and coordination with
Fibrebond for new modular building.
BID ITEM 18 – NEW FENCE AND GATES
Payment for furnishing and installing new fence and gates shall be by the linear
foot of fence and gates installed. The unit cost shall constitute full compensation
for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment and doing all work involved
to provide the perimeter fence and gate. The unit cost shall include fence,
framework, barbed wire, fabric, accessories, excavation for post bases and
concrete foundation for posts. Cost shall Manual sliding gates and related
hardware.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
41
BID ITEM 19 - FIBER ROLL
Payment for furnishing and installing the fiber roll shall be by the linear foot of
fiber roll, and shall include full compensation for furnishing the labor, materials,
tools, and equipment and doing all the work involved in accordance with the
Contract Documents, including but not limited to preparation of erosion control
materials, placing fiber roll, staking, replacement of damaged materials, proper
maintenance of materials throughout the duration of construction.
BID ITEM 20 - HYDROSEED
Payment for furnishing and installing hydroseed shall be by the square yard, and
shall include full compensation for furnishing the labor, materials, tools, and
equipment and doing all the work involved in accordance with the Contract
Documents, including but not limited to preparation of disturbed ground and
erosion-control materials, planting of seed, replacement of damaged materials,
watering, and maintenance throughout duration of construction.
BID ITEM 21 – ELECTRICAL CONDUIT, WIRE & CABLE TRAY
Payment for electrical conduit, wire & cable tray shall be made on a percent complete,
based on the lump sum amount for this item, and shall include full compensation for
furnishing the labor, materials, tools, and equipment and doing all the work involved to
install new conduit, wire and cable tray in accordance with the Contract Documents
including, but not limited to procurement, installation, routing, testing and connecting
to required electrical devices per plans, specifications and NEC.
BID ITEM 22 - TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL POWER EQUIPMENT (ONE MONTH
RENTAL)
Payment for temporary electrical power equipment shall be made on a percent
complete, based on the lump sum amount for this item, and shall include full
compensation for furnishing the labor, materials, tools, and equipment and doing all
the work involved to maintain uninterrupted electrical power service throughout the
project duration in accordance with the Contract Documents including, but not limited
to installing, operating, and maintaining temporary electrical service during
construction, installing light fixtures, hookups, cables, temporary connections, site
grading for level pad for placement of equipment, monitoring and maintenance of
equipment and all other work and appurtenances required to maintain existing
electrical power services around work areas.
BID ITEM 23 – AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
Payment for furnishing and installing the automatic transfer switch shall be made on a
percent complete basis, based on the lump sum amount for this item, and shall
include full compensation for furnishing the labor, materials, tools, and equipment and
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
42
doing all the work involved in accordance with the Contract Documents including, but
not limited to procurement, installation, connecting, and testing for functionality with
both utility and standby (generator) sources of power.
BID ITEM 24 – METER CABINET
Payment for furnishing and installing the meter cabinet shall be made on a percent
complete basis, based on the lump sum amount for this item, and shall include full
compensation for furnishing the labor, materials, tools, and equipment and doing all
the work involved in accordance with the Contract Documents including, but not
limited to procurement, connecting, and installation in coherence with PG&E
standards.
BID ITEM 25 – REMOVE/RELOCATE/RETUNE EXISTING RADIO EQUIPMENT
Payment for the removal, relocation and/or retuning of existing radio equipment shall
be made on a percent complete basis, based on the lump sum amount for this item,
and shall include full compensation for furnishing the labor, materials, tools, and
equipment and doing all the work involved in accordance with the Contract
Documents including, but not limited to proper removal and disposal, relocation per
the plans, and retuning to meet the needs of the upgrades for the site.
BID ITEM 26 – GROUNDING
Payment for furnishing and installing the electrical grounding for the site shall be
made on a percent complete basis, based on the lump sum amount for this item, and
shall include full compensation for furnishing the labor, materials, tools, and
equipment and doing all the work involved in accordance with the Contract
Documents including, but not limited to procurement of ground rods and various sizes
of grounding wires, installation, connecting, and testing for a resistance of under 5
ohms.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
43
SECTION 01330 SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittal procedures.
B. Construction progress schedules.
C. Proposed Products list.
D. Product Data.
E. Shop Drawings.
F. Design data.
G. Test reports.
H. Certificates.
I. Manufacturer's instructions.
J. Manufacturer's field reports.
K. Erection drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Transmit 4 sets plus the number of submittals the Contractor wishes to
receive back of each submittal to Engineer with Engineer accepted form;
OR, one electronic submittal emailed to the Engineer in pdf format.
B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original
number and a sequential alphabetic suffix.
C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing
and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate.
D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review,
approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent
construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with
the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
44
E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Engineer at
business address. Coordinate submittal of related items.
F. For each submittal for review, allow 14 days excluding delivery time from
and to the contractor.
G. Variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations
which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed
Work will not be approved.
H. Provide space for Contractor and Engineer review stamps.
I. When revised for resubmittal, identify all changes made since previous
submittal.
J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to
promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.
K. Submittals deemed unnecessary by Engineer will be returned without
review or comment.
1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit initial schedule in triplicate to Engineer within 14 days of receiving
Notice to Proceed. Task designation and completion intervals shall be
reviewed and approved by Engineer.
B. Revise and resubmit as required.
C. Submit updated schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying
changes and progress to date since previous version.
D. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major portion of
Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week.
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
A. Product Data For Review:
1. Submitted to Engineer for review for the limited purpose of
checking for conformance with information given and the design
concept expressed in the contract documents.
2. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
45
B. Product Data For Information:
1. Submitted for the Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator
or for the City.
C. Product Data For Project Close-out:
1. Submitted for the City's benefit during and after project completion.
D. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two
copies which will be retained by the Engineer.
E. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other
data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information
specific to this Project.
F. Indicate Product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection
requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional
equipment and appliances.
G. After review distribute in accordance with the Submittal Procedures article.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings For Review:
1. Submitted to Engineer for review for the limited purpose of
checking for conformance with information given and the design
concept expressed in the contract documents.
2. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article.
B. Shop Drawings For Information:
1. Submitted for the Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator
or for the City.
C. Shop Drawings For Project Close-out:
1. Submitted for the City's benefit during and after project completion.
D. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection
requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional
equipment and appliances.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
46
E. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires,
plus two copies which will be retained by Engineer.
1.6 DESIGN DATA
A. Submit for the Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for the
City.
B. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance
with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract
documents.
1.7 TEST REPORTS
A. Submit for the Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for the
City.
B. Submit test reports for information for the limited purpose of assessing
conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in
the contract documents.
1.8 CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by
the manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or the Contractor
to Engineer, in quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified
requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and
certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product,
but must be acceptable to Engineer.
1.9 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting,
and finishing, to Engineer for delivery to City in quantities specified for
Product Data.
B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special
attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or
installation.
C. Quality Control, Manufacturers' Field Services article.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
47
1.10 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD REPORTS
A. Submit reports for the Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for
the City.
B. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Engineer for
information.
C. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance
with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract
documents.
1.11 ERECTION DRAWINGS
A. Submit drawings for the Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for
the City.
B. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance
with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract
documents.
C. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to
action by the Engineer or City.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUMMARY
A. Per plans and specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUMMARY
A. Submit the required number of shop drawings and product submittals to
Engineer for review, acceptance, or rejection.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
48
SECTION 01520 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Contractor shall provide its own office and construction utilities including the
cost of permits, usage, generation, installation, relocation, distribution,
maintenance, safety, disposal, and removal.
B. Contractor shall not install or remove any temporary utility without prior written
approval of the Engineer.
C. Temporary utilities placed underground shall be permanently marked as to
prevent damage by others, and accurately located for removal. Damage to
above ground and underground utilities by the Contractor shall be repaired or
replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the District.
D. Obtain permits and inspections required by public utility companies, State of
California, San Luis Obispo County and/or special districts for the installation
and use of temporary utilities. Utility installations shall comply with all codes and
regulations.
E. The Contractor is cautioned that there is limited space available on site for
temporary storage yards, parking, storage buildings, and temporary office
space. Limited staging area will be made available to the Contractor. Staging
area is limited to within existing District property while access to is maintained
for Owner, Engineer, Utilities, and others. Grading is not permitted.
The Contractor shall satisfy itself that the staging area is adequate for the
Contractor’s use. If the staging area is not adequate, the Contractor shall find
additional staging area for itself offsite. The cost for additional staging area shall
be included in the Contractor’s bid and no additional payment will be made to the
Contractor for additional staging area.
F. Contractor shall submit for approval the Contractor’s proposed plan for
temporary utilities, storage facilities/yards, temporary offices/trailers, and
temporary construction water.
G. Provide power required for construction operations. Reimburse Owner for the cost
of any permanent power used, including power used for testing and
commissioning of equipment and systems.
1.2 CONSTRUCTION WATER
A. Obtain a water meter from the Owner and pay deposit, refundable upon
return of the water meter without damage.
B. For all necessary operations at the site of the work (except as noted in the next
paragraph below) the Owner, without charge therefor, shall provide a reasonable
quantity of water at existing pressure from a mutual convenient hydrant of the
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
49
water distribution system. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary pipe or hose
extensions to conduct the water to the points of use and shall exercise due care
not to waste water. The Contractor shall not contaminate the water supply and
shall comply with all applicable regulations and code requirements.
C. The Owner reserves the right to limit, suspend, or terminate the supplying of
water as set forth above should it consider such action to be necessary on
account of damage to the distribution system, the necessity of conserving
water, other emergency, or Contractor’s failure to comply with requirements of
this section. In this event, the Contractor shall obtain water from some other
approved source, at his own expense.
1.3 ELECTRICAL POWER – CONSTRUCTION PHASE
A. Provide for the purchase of power or provide portable power for the construction
of the project where existing outlets are not available. Provide for the extension
of utility lines to the point of usage. A temporary generator is The cost of power
shall be included in the appropriate bid items to which it is appurtenant and shall
include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment
required to obtain and distribute power for construction purposes.
B. Reimburse Owner for the cost of any permanent power used, including power
used for testing and commissioning of equipment and systems.
C. Temporary electrical power installation shall comply with applicable Local
codes and requirements of the California Electric Code.
1.4 DUST CONTROL
A. Perform dust control operations to prevent construction operations from
producing dust in amounts harmful to persons or causing a nuisance to persons
living nearby or occupying buildings in the vicinity of the work. Use water or dust
preventative to control dust.
1.5 FIRE DANGER
A. Minimize fire danger in the vicinity of and adjacent to the construction site.
Provide labor and equipment to protect the surrounding private property from the
fire damage resulting from construction operations.
1.6 SANITARY CONVENIENCES
A. The Contractor shall provide adequate sanitary facilities, including toilets and
hand disinfection, for the use of employed on the Work. Such facilities shall
include be made available when the first employees arrive on the site of the
Work, shall be properly secluded from public observation, and shall be
constructed and maintained during the progress of the Work in suitable numbers
and at such points and in such manner as may be required.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
50
B. The Contractor shall maintain the sanitary facilities in a satisfactory and
sanitary condition at all times and shall enforce their use.
1.7 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCES & GATES
A. Contractor may, upon approval by Engineer, install temporary fences, gates,
barricades, or other suitable means to protect property and prevent damage and
injury.
1.8 ILLUMINATION
A. The Contractor shall provide temporary lighting in all work areas sufficient to
maintain a lighting level during working hours not less than the lighting level
required by OSHA standards.
B. Permanent building lighting may not be used during construction.
1.9 PROGRESS/WORK AREA CLEANING
A. Maintain staging and work areas in a clean and orderly condition free from trash.
“Trash” shall include all: food scraps, office garbage, construction rubbish/debris,
waste/excess materials, shipping/packing materials, and windblown trash. Trash
shall be collected and placed into containers daily at designated waste storage
areas in locations approved by the Owner, and removed periodically for offsite
disposal at Contractor’s expense.
1.10 REMOVAL
A. Remove temporary equipment, facilities, and materials prior to request
for final inspection.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation and use of temporary work.
C. Remove all temporary site improvements. All materials removed shall be
disposed of off- site and the area shall be returned to the design as set forth in
Contract Documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not Used
PART 3 – EXECUTION – Not Used
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
51
PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
52
SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Requirements Included:
1. Close Out Procedures.
2. Final Cleaning.
3. Project Record Documents.
4. Systems Demonstration.
5. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.
6. Project Record Documents.
7. Product Warranties and Product Bonds.
8. Protecting Installed Construction.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01730: Operation and Maintenance Data
1.02 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
C. Comply with procedures stated in General Conditions of the Contract for
issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion.
D. When Contractor considers Work has reached final completion, submit
written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work
has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with
Contract Documents and ready for the Engineer's inspection.
E. In addition to submittals required by the conditions of the Contract, provide
submittals required by governing authorities, and submit a final statement
of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and
sum remaining due.
F. The Engineer will issue a final Change Order reflecting approved
adjustments to Contract Sum not previously made by Change Order.
1.03 FINAL CLEANING
G. Execute prior to final inspection.
H. Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary
labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
53
surfaces. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean or
replace filters or mechanical equipment. Clean roofs, gutters,
downspouts, and drainage systems.
I. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean other surfaces.
J. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities
from the Project and from the site.
1.04 STARTING OF SYSTEMS
K. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
L. Notify Engineer, City, and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.
M. Verify each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper
lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for
conditions which may cause damage.
N. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree
with those required by equipment or system manufacturer.
O. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and
tested.
P. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's
representative and Contractor’s personnel in accordance with
manufacturers' instructions.
Q. When specified in individual specification sections, require manufacturer to
provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check,
and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to
supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
1.05 SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION
R. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to City's personnel
two weeks prior to date of final inspection.
S. Demonstrate Project equipment and provide instruction by qualified
manufacturer's representative who is knowledgeable about the Project.
T. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction.
Review contents of manual with City's personnel in detail to explain all
aspects of operation and maintenance.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
54
U. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting,
servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at start-
up, at equipment location.
V. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals
when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
W. Required instruction time for each item of equipment and system is
specified in individual sections.
1.06 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
X. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in
quantities specified in individual specification sections.
Y. Spare parts shall be labeled, contained and organized in a matter that
does not mix parts of different groups together and allows easy
identification of the type and purpose of each spare part.
Z. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
AA. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual
revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
BB. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by
Owner.
CC. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
DD. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than
weekly.
EE. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section
description of actual products installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
FF. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
55
actual construction including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities
and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface
improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances
concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible
features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract drawings.
GG. Submit documents to Engineer before claim for final Application for
Payment.
1.08 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS
HH. Obtain warranties and bonds executed in duplicate by responsible
subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after
completion of applicable item of work.
II. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from
subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
JJ. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are
notarized.
KK. Co-execute submittals when required.
LL. Include Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with
durable plastic cover.
MM. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
NN. Time Of Submittals:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service
during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents
within ten days after acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial
Completion, prior to final Application for Payment.
3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of
Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance,
listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty or bond period.
1.09 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
56
OO. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in
individual specification sections.
PP. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products.
Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.
QQ. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits
of openings.
RR. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear,
damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet
materials.
SS. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. When
traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from
waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.
TT. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3- EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
57
SECTION 01710 MOBILIZATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all preparatory work and operations
required prior to beginning WORK.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Mobilization shall include, but not limited to, the following:
1. Movement of personnel, tools, equipment, materials, supplies, and incidentals
to the PROJECT site and all preparatory work, including installation of
PROJECT sign.
2. Establishment of all necessary facilities, including acquisition of easements
for the CONTRACTOR’s convenience.
3. Obtaining permits necessary for the execution of the WORK.
4. Providing required bonds and proof of insurance.
5. Upon completion of the WORK, CONTRACTOR shall remove tools,
equipment, and unused materials and supplies from the PROJECT site
and restore all disturbed areas outside the PROJECT area to their pre-
construction condition.
B. DISTRICT has the right to reject construction tools, equipment, materials, and
supplies which are, in DISTRICT’s opinion, unsafe, improver, or inadequate.
1. CONTRACTOR shall bring rejected construction tools, equipment,
materials, and supplies to an acceptable condition as approved by
OWNER or remove from the PROJECT site.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures.
B. In accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures, CONTRACTOR
shall submit within seven (7) days after the effective date of the NOTICE TO
PROCEED, a layout of the PROJECT site including fences, roads, parking,
buildings, storage areas, drainage plans, temporary building layouts, and
temporary utility locations.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not Used
PART 3 – EXECUTION – Not Used
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
58
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
59
PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
60
SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Format and content of manuals.
1. Contents One Each Volume:
a. Manual for Equipment and Systems
b. Submittal of Operation and Maintenance Data
c. Instruction of Engineer's personnel.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittals procedures. Shop drawings,
product data, and samples.
B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract closeout procedures, project
record documents.
C. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operation and
maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance
and operation of described products.
1.4 FORMAT
A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
B. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with
durable clear “view pocket” plastic covers for inserting cover sheets.
When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent
groupings.
C. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of project; identify volume
number for multiple volume references.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
61
D. Provide tabbed indexed for each separate product and system, with typed
description of product and major component parts of equipment.
E. Text: Manufacturer's original printed data. Photocopies of preprinted data
will not be accepted.
F. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text;
fold larger drawings neatly to size of text pages.
G. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each
Product or system description identified, in three parts as follows:
1. Part 1:Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers
of Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment
suppliers.
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by
system and subdivided by specification section. For each category,
identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Subcontractors, supplies and parts distributor. Identify the following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including
recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special
precautions identifying detrimental agents.
3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a. Shop drawings and product data.
b. Certificates.
c. Photocopies of warranties.
4. Part 4: Design Data.
5. Provide complete table of contents in each binder.
1.5 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME
A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of Engineer, Subconsultants, and Contractor with
name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
62
to content of the volume.
B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of
supplies and replacement parts.
C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and
component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable
information.
D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component
parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do
not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
E. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical
sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's
instructions.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each.
G. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's
recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against
detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning
and maintenance.
H. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data
listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details
of installation. Include recommendations for inspections, maintenance,
and repair.
I. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification
sections.
J. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet
and space for insertion of data.
1.6 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Each item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or
system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating
characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with
engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model
number of replacement parts.
B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics,
controls, and communications; typed.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
63
C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.
D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal
operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control,
stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer,
winter, and any special operating instructions.
E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for
troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and
alignment, adjusting, balancing and checking instructions.
F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
I. Include original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings,
and diagrams required for maintenance.
J. Include control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.
K. Include Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping
diagrams as installed.
L. Include charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each
valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.
M. Include list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
N. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01400.
O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification
sections.
P. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers
and space for insertion of data.
1.7 INSTRUCTION OF CITY PERSONNEL
A. Before final inspection, instruct City's designated personnel in operation,
adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at
agreed upon times.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
64
B. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review
contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of
operation and maintenance.
C. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual
when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction.
1.8 SUBMITTAL OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of
contents before 75% of work is completed.
B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during
construction and operated by City, submit two copies of documents within
10 days after taking occupancy of equipment or component parts, one copy
of which is to be retained with the equipment or component part. These two
copies are in addition to the four sets required by subparagraph D below.
C. Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to inspection. This
copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Engineer
comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final
submission.
D. Submit four sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after
final inspection.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3- EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
65
SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. General. This section covers the removal of existing facilities at the
existing site, in accordance with the Contract Construction Drawings.
B. Site visit. It is the responsibility of the Bidders to visit the site and
make their own determinations and conclusions as to the extent and
difficulty of performing the removal work required in accordance with
these specifications.
C. Scope. All piping, slabs, buildings, and other appurtenant equipment
and facilities not used for construction shall be removed from the site
as directed by the City.
1.2 PRESERVATION OF PROPERTY
A. Existing facilities, which are to remain in place, shall be protected by
the Contractor. Existing facilities which are to be razed, demolished,
abandoned or removed shall also be protected in-place by the
Contractor until the specified operation is scheduled for in the
Sequence of Construction, called for in the General Requirements
Division of these specifications.
B. Any damage by construction operations to site improvements or
existing facilities shall be repaired or replaced in kind by the Contractor
at his expense and be acceptable to the Owner.
C. Perform demolition in such manner as to eliminate hazards to persons
and property; to minimize interference with use of adjacent areas,
utilities and structures or interruption of use of such utilities; and to
provide free passage to and from such adjacent areas of structures.
D. Provide safeguards, including warning signs, barricades, temporary
fences, warning lights, and other similar items that are required for
protection of all personnel during demolition and removal operations.
E. The contractor shall take necessary precautions to avoid damages to
existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the
property of the District; any damaged items shall be repaired or
replaced as approved by the Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall
coordinate the work of this section with all other work and shall
construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. The
Contractor shall ensure that structural elements
are not overloaded and shall be responsible for increasing structural
supports or adding new supports as may be required as a result of any
cutting, removal, or demolition work performed under this contract. Do
not overload structural elements. Provide new supports and
reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition or
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
66
removal works. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement must
have Resident Engineer’s approval.
PART 2 - MATERIALS (NOT USED)
Not Used.
PART 3 - PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Completely demolish and remove structures and equipment,
including all appurtenances related or connected thereto as shown
on the Plans.
B. The Contractor shall notify and coordinate with the Owner 24 hours in
advance of any delivery of salvaged equipment. The Owner will be
responsible for unloading the equipment. Materials not needed or
desired by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall recycle the removed material pursuant to health
codes.
C. Salvaged materials shall not be stored at the site of work unless
approved by the Owner, and the Contractor shall remove in a timely
manner all salvaged materials.
D. Debris. Debris and refuse generated from removal operations shall be
legally disposed of by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor
shall not allow the accumulation of debris or refuse in any quantity that
represents a health or safety hazard, or that impairs any operations on
site. All debris and refuse shall be disposed of off -site in a timely
manner. No debris or refuse shall be used as fill material or to fill voids
caused by the removal of structures. Care shall be taken to prevent
spillage on haul routes. Any such spillage shall be removed
immediately and the area cleaned.
E. Cleanup and Dust Control. Throughout all phases of removal the
Contractor shall abate dust nuisance by cleaning, sweeping, and
sprinkling with water or other means necessary. The use of water
resulting in mud on public streets will not be permitted as a substitute
for sweeping or other methods.
F. Remove or abandon existing utilities as indicated on the Plans. When
Utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the drawings,
the Resident Engineer shall be notified prior to further work in that
area.
G. Upon completion of the work, the site shall be cleared of equipment,
unused materials and rubbish so as to present a satisfactory clean
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
67
and neat appearance.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
68
SECTION 02060 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Aggregate Base Course.
2. Class 2 Permeable.
3. Drain Rock.
4. Gravel.
5. Imported Fill.
6. Native Material.
7. Sand.
8. Select Material.
9. Stabilization Material.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C 117 - Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-µm (No. 200)
Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.
2. C 131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-
Size Course Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles
Machine.
3. C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and
Course Aggregates.
4. D 422 - Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.
5. D 2419 - Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and
Fine Aggregate.
6. D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
Plasticity Index of Soils.
7. D 4829 - Standard Test Method for Expansion Index for Soils.
B. California Department of Transportation:
1. Standard Specifications.
2. California Test 205.
3. California Test 211.
4. California Test 217.
5. California Test 229.
6. California Test 301.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1. Material source.
2. Gradation.
3. Testing data.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
69
B. Quality control for aggregate base course:
1. Test reports: Reports for tests required by Sections of Standard
Specifications, State of California, Department of Transportation, Latest
edition.
2. Certificates of Compliance: Certificates as required by Sections of
Standard Specifications, State of California, Department of
Transportation, Latest edition.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and protection: Protect from segregation and excessive moisture
during delivery, storage, and handling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Provide material having maximum particle size not exceeding 4
inches and that is free of trash, lumber, debris, leaves, grass, roots,
stumps, and other organic matter.
2. Materials derived from processing demolished or removed asphalt
concrete are not acceptable.
B. Aggregate base course:
1. Class 2, conforming to Section 26-1.02A of the Standard
Specifications, 3/4-inch maximum aggregate size free from
organic matter and other
deleterious substances, and of such nature that aggregate can be
compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a firm, stable
base.
2. Aggregate base course for structures:
a. Consist of crushed or fragmented particles.
b. Coarse aggregate material retained in Number 4 sieve shall
consist of material of which at least 25 percent by weight shall be
crushed particles when tested in accordance with California Test
205.
3. Aggregate shall not be treated with lime, cement, or other chemical
material.
4. Durability index: Not less than 35 when tested in accordance with
California Test 229.
5. Aggregate grading and sand equivalent tests shall be performed to
represent not more than 500 cubic yards or 1 day's production of
material, whichever is smaller.
6. Sand equivalent: Not less than 25 when tested in accordance with
California Test 217.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
70
7. Resistance (R-value): Not less than 78 when tested in
accordance with California Test 301.
8. Conform to size and grade within the limits as follows when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 117 and ASTM C 136:
Sieve Sizes (Square Openings) Percent by Weight Passing Sieve
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 90-100
Number 4 35-62
Number 30 10-30
Number 200 2-9
C. Class 2 permeable:
1. Durability index: Not less than 40 when tested in accordance with
California Test 229.
2. Conform to Standard Specifications Section 68-2.02F.
3. Consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or
crushed to the specified size and gradation.
4. Provide free of organic matter, lumps or balls of clay, and other
deleterious matter.
5. Sand equivalent: Not less than 75 when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2419.
6. Conform to size and grade within the limits as follows when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 117 and C 136:
Sieve Size (Square Openings) Percent by Weight Passing Sieve
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 90-100
3/8 inch 40-100
Number 4 25-40
Number 8 18-33
Number 30 5-15
Number 50 0-7
Number 200 0-3
D. Drain rock:
1. Durability index: Not less than 40 when tested in accordance with
California Test 229.
2. Consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or
crushed to specified size and gradation.
3. Free from organic matter, lumps or balls of clay, or other deleterious
matter.
4. Crush or waste coarse material and waste fine material as required to
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
71
meet gradation requirements.
5. Conform to size and grade within the limits as follows when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 117 and C 136:
Sieve Size (Square Openings) Percent By Weight Passing Sieve
2 inch 100
1-1/2 inch 95-100
3/4 inch 50-100
3/8 inch 15-55
Number 200 0-2
E. Gravel:
1. Consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or
crushed to the specified sizes and gradations.
2. Free of organic matter, lumps or balls of clay, and other deleterious matter.
3. Crush or waste coarse material, and add or waste fine material in
order to meet the specified gradations.
4. Fraction of material passing number 40 sieve: Material having plasticity
index not greater than 5 when tested in accordance with ASTM D
4318.
5. Durability percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent when
tested in accordance with California Test 211.
6. Conform to sizes and grade within the limits as follows when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 117 and C 136:
Sieve Size
(Square Openings)
Percent by Weight Passing Sieve
Type A Type B Type C
2 inch 100 - -
1-1/2 inch 95-100 100 -
3/4 inch 35-60 55-85 100
3/8 inch 15-40 35-65 50-100
Number 4 0-25 20-35 30-45
Number 30 - 5-15 10-20
Number 200 0-5 2-9 2-9
F. Imported material for structural:
1. Any imported material is to be tested and approved by the
OWNER’s Geotechnical Engineer.
2. Sound, earthen material passing 1-inch sieve.
3. Expansion index less than 20 when tested in accordance with ASTM D
4829.
4. Caltrans Standard Specification for Structure Backfill, Section 19-
3.02B or approved onsite sandy soil having a sand equivalent
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
72
greater than 20.
G. Native material (on-site soil):
1. Sound, earthen material passing 1-inch sieve.
2. Free of organics, oversize rock (greater than 3 inches), trash,
debris, corrosive, and other deleterious materials.
3. Percent of material by weight passing Number 4 sieve shall be at
least 75 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 422.
4. Expansion index less than 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM
D4829.
H. Sand:
1. Clean, coarse, natural sand.
2. Non-plastic when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
3. One hundred percent shall pass a 1/2-inch screen.
4. No more than 20 percent shall pass a Number 200 sieve.
I. Select material:
1. Sound earthen material for which sum of plasticity index when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 4318 and the percent of material by weight
passing Number 200 sieve shall not exceed 23 when tested in
accordance with
ASTM D 422.
2. Organic content shall not be greater than 3 percent by volume.
J. Stabilization material:
1. Durability percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent when
tested in accordance with California Test 211.
2. Consist of clean, hard, durable particles of crushed rock or gravel
screened or crushed to the specified sizes and gradations.
3. Shall be free of any detrimental quantity of soft, friable, thin,
elongated, or laminated pieces, disintegrated material, organic
matter, oil, alkali, or other deleterious substance.
4. Shall be free of slaking or decomposition under the action of alternate
wetting and drying.
5. The portion of material retained on the 3/8-inch sieve shall contain
at least 50 percent of particles having three or more fractured faces.
Not over
5 percent shall be pieces that show no such faces resulting from
crushing. Of the portion that passes the 3/8-inch sieve, but is retained
on the No. 4 sieve, not more than 10 percent shall be pieces that show
no faces resulting from crushing.
6. Conform to size and grade when tested in accordance with ASTM C
117 and ASTM C 136.
Sieve Size (Square Openings) Percent by Weight Passing Sieve
1 inch 100
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
73
3/4 inch 90-100
Number 4 0-10
Number 200 0-2
K. Course Aggregate for Trench Stabilization:
1. Consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or
crushed to the specified sizes and gradations.
2. Free of organic matter, lumps or balls of clay, and other deleterious matter.
3. Conforming to ASTM C33 No. 8 Coarse Aggregate or Section 90-
1.02C(4)(b) of the Standard Specifications.
4. One hundred percent shall pass a 1-1/2-inch screen.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
74
SECTION 02200 SITE CLEARING & PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Clearing, grubbing, and stripping project site.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. San Luis Obispo County 2014 Public Improvement Standards.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Clearing: Consists of removal of natural obstructions and existing
foundations, buildings, fences, lumber, walls, stumps, brush, weeds,
rubbish, trees, boulders, utility lines, and any other items that interfere
with construction operations or are designated for removal.
B. Grubbing: Consists of removal and disposal of wood or root matter below
ground surface remaining after clearing and includes stumps, trunks, roots,
or root systems greater than 1-inch diameter or thickness to a 6-inch depth
below ground surface.
C. Stripping: Includes removal and disposal of all organic sod, topsoil, grass
and grass roots, and other objectionable material remaining after clearing
and grubbing from the areas designated to be stripped. The depth of
stripping will be determined by the ENGINEER.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory requirements: Verify and comply with applicable regulations
regarding those governing noise, dust, nuisance, drainage and runoff, fire
protection, and disposal.
B. Pre-construction conference: Meet with ENGINEER to discuss order and
method of work.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental requirements:
1. For suspected hazardous materials found, notify ENGINEER
immediately.
B. Existing Conditions:
1. Verify character and amount of clay, sand, gravel, quicksand,
water, rock, hardpan, and other material involved and work to be
performed.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
75
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Clearing and grubbing: Perform clearing and grubbing in advance of
grading operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Examine site and verify existing conditions for
beginning work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect existing improvements from damage by site preparation work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Clearing:
1. Clear areas where construction is to be performed and other areas
as indicated on the Drawings, or specified in this Section, of
fences, lumber, walls, stumps, brush, roots, weeds, trees, shrubs,
rubbish, and other objectionable material of any kind which, if left
in place, would interfere with proper performance or completion of
the work, would impair its subsequent use, or form obstructions.
2. Do not incorporate organic material from clearing and grubbing
operations in fills and backfills.
3. CONTRACTOR's temporary construction facilities: Fill or remove
pits, fill, and other earthwork required for erection of facilities, upon
completion of the work, and level to meet existing contours of
adjacent ground.
B. Grubbing:
1. From excavated areas: Grub stumps, roots, and other obstructions 3
inches or over in diameter to depth of not less than 18 inches below
finish grade.
2. In embankment areas or other areas to be cleared outside
construction area: Do not leave stumps, roots, and other
obstructions higher than the following requirements:
Height of Embankment
over Stump
Depth of Clearing and Grubbing
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
76
0 feet to 2 feet Grub stumps or roots 3 inches or over in diameter
to 18 inches below original grade. Cut others flush
with ground.
2 feet to 3 feet Grub stumps 1 foot and over in diameter to
18 inches below original grade. Cut others flush
with ground.
Over 3 feet Leave no stumps higher than stump top diameter,
and in no case more than 18 inches.
3. Backfill and compact cavities left below subgrade elevation by
removal of stumps or roots to density of adjacent undisturbed
soil.
C. Stripping:
1. Remove soil material to depth of 3 feet throughout the entire plant site .
2. Deposit stripped material in accordance with following requirements:
a. At locations acceptable to ENGINEER.
b. Use accepted material in top 6 inches of areas to be used for
future planting.
3. Replace topsoil where indicated on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
77
SECTION 02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Requirements for designing, furnishing and installing,
maintaining, and removing excavation support and protection.
B. Related sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by
one is as binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating
the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities
performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR’s Work.
3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section.
This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not
intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the
CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC):
1. Steel Construction Manual.
B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1. Guidelines of Engineering Practice for Braced and Tied-Back
Excavations.
C. California Code of Regulations (CCR):
1. Title 8 - Industrial Relations.
a. Chapter 3.2. California Occupational Safety and Health
Regulations (CAL/OSHA).
D. California Labor Code (CLC).
E. Department of the Navy Naval Facilities Engineering Command (NAVFAC):
1. Design Manual 7.2 - Foundations and Earth Structures.
2. Design Manual 7.3 - Soil Dynamics and Special Design Aspects
F. State of California Department of Transportation (Caltrans):
1. Caltrans California Trenching and Shoring Manual.
G. United States Steel Corporation (USS):
1. Steel Sheet Piling Design Manual.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
78
A. General Engineering Design Practice: General engineering design practice in
area of the Project, performed in accordance with recent engineering
literature on subject of shoring and stability of excavations.
B. Shoring: A temporary structural system designed to support vertical faces,
or nearly vertical faces, of soil or rock for purposes of excavation. Shoring
includes cantilevered sheet piling, internally braced sheet piling, slurry
walls, soldier piles and lagging, and other similar shoring systems. Sloping
of the soil is not shoring.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Where General Engineering Design Practice is specified, provide
drawings and signed calculations and have design performed by civil or
structural engineer registered in State where the Project is located:
1. Provide design calculations that clearly disclose assumptions made,
criteria followed, and stress values used for the materials being
used.
2. Furnish references acceptable to ENGINEER substantiating
appropriateness of design assumptions, criteria, and stress values.
B. Design requirements:
1. General:
a. Design means for safe and stable excavations in accordance with
general engineering design practice:
1) The preceding requirement shall not apply to trench
excavation support conforming to standards set forth in
CCR Title 8, Chapter 3.2.
b. Design steel members in accordance with the building code as
specified in Section 01410 and the AISC Manual of Steel Design.
c. Design shoring involving materials other than steel in
accordance with building code as specified in Section 01410.
d. Perform design in accordance with soil characteristics and design
recommendations contained in a written geotechnical report issued
and signed by a geotechnical engineer hired by the
CONTRACTOR. Geotechnical engineer shall be registered in the
state where the Project is located:
1) Make copy of geotechnical report available at project
site for ENGINEER's review.
2) Retain and pay for geotechnical engineer's services.
3) Obtain report based on soil samples, field and laboratory
tests, and borings performed for the geotechnical report for
the design of stability of excavations by the geotechnical
engineer hired by CONTRACTOR.
e. When electing to design with material stresses for temporary
construction higher than allowable stresses prescribed in the AISC
Steel Construction Manual and the building code as specified in
Section 01410, increase in such stresses shall not exceed 10
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
79
percent of value of prescribed stresses.
f. Minimum safety factor used for design shall not be less than 1.5.
g. The calculated minimum depth of penetration of shoring below the
bottom of the excavation shall be increased not less than 30
percent if the full value of passive pressure is used in the design.
h. The maximum height of cantilever shoring above the bottom of
excavation shall not exceed 15 feet.
1) Use braced shoring when the height of shoring above the
bottom of excavation exceeds 15 feet.
i. The location of the point of fixity for shoring shall not be less than
half the calculated minimum embedment depth below the bottom
of the excavation.
j. Generally acceptable references for the design of
shoring and excavations are as follows:
1) Caltrans California Trenching and Shoring Manual.
2) NAVFAC Design Manual 7.2.
3) NAVFAC Design Manual 7.3.
4) USS Steel Sheet Piling Design Manual.
5) ASCE Guidelines of Engineering Practice for Braced and
Tied-Back Excavations.
2. Soldier piles and lagging:
a. Provide lagging over the full face of the excavation. Joints between
pieces of lagging shall be tight to prevent loss of soil.
b. Provide full face lagging all around penetrations through the lagging.
c. If the soldier piles are installed in predrilled holes, the predrilled
holes shall be filled with control density backfill after the soldier
piles are installed.
d. The effective width of driven soldier piles for passive soil
resistance shall not exceed 2 times the width of the pile.
1) The effective width of concrete encased soldier piles for
passive soil resistance shall not exceed 2 times the width of
the concrete encasement.
e. Fill voids behind lagging with gravel or other material acceptable
to the ENGINEER.
f. Apply loads from tie back soil, rock, or deadman anchors
concentrically to soldier piles or wales spanning between soldier
piles.
1) Wales shall be back-to-back double channels or other
members acceptable to the ENGINEER.
2) Eccentrically loaded with section soldier piles or wales
are not acceptable.
g. Design soldier piles for downward loads including vertical loads
from tie back anchors.
3. Soil anchors, rock anchors, and deadmen anchors:
a. Design tie back anchors for a safety factor of not less than 2
times the calculated load from the shoring.
b. Proof load all production anchors to not less than 150 percent
of the calculated load from the shoring.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
80
1) Lock off anchors at the calculated anchor load.
c. The length of soil anchors used to calculate resistance to load
from the shoring shall not include any length within the potential
active pressure soil failure zone behind the face of shoring.
d. Design tie rods for anchors for 130 percent of the calculated load
from the shoring.
e. Design tie rods for anchors for 150 percent of the calculated load
from the shoring when tie rod couplers are used and for other
conditions where stress concentrations can develop.
C. Performance requirements:
1. General:
a. Support faces of excavations and protect structures and
improvements in vicinity of excavations from damage and loss of
function due to settlement or movement of soils, alterations in
ground water level caused by such excavations, and related
operations.
b. Specified provisions:
1) Complement, but do not substitute or diminish, obligations of
CONTRACTOR for the furnishing of a safe place of work
pursuant to provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health
Act of 1970 and its subsequent amendments and regulations
and for protection of the Work, structures, and other
improvements.
2) Represent minimum requirement for:
a) Number and types of means needed to maintain soil
stability.
b) Strength of such required means.
c) Methods and frequency of maintenance and
observation of means used for maintaining soil
stability.
2. Provide safe and stable excavations by means of sheeting, shoring,
bracing, sloping, and other means and procedures, such as draining
and recharging groundwater and routing and disposing of surface
runoff, required to maintain the stability of soils and rock.
3. Provide support for trench excavations for protection of workers from
hazard of caving ground.
4. Provide shoring:
a. Where, as result of excavation work and analysis performed
pursuant to general engineering design practice, as defined in
this Section:
1) Excavated face or surrounding soil mass may be subject to
slides, caving, or other types of failures.
2) Stability and integrity of structures and other improvements
may be compromised by settlement or movement of soils, or
changes in soil load on structures and other improvements.
b. For trenches 5 feet and deeper.
c. For trenches less than 5 feet in depth, when there is a potential for
cave-in.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
81
d. Where indicated on the Drawings.
5. For safe and stable excavations, use appropriate design and
procedures for construction and maintenance to minimize settlement
of supported ground and to prevent damage to structures and other
improvements, including:
a. Using stiff support systems.
b. Following appropriate construction sequence.
c. Preventing soil loss through or under support system:
1) Provide support system that is tight enough to prevent loss
of soil and extend deep enough to prevent heave or flow of
soils from supported soil mass into the excavation.
d. Providing surface runoff routing and discharge away from
excavations.
e. Where dewatering is necessary, recharge groundwater as
necessary to prevent settlement in area surrounding excavation.
f. Where sheet piling is used, use interlocking type sheets.
1) The sheet piles shall be continuous and driven in interlock.
2) If the bottom of the excavation is located below the water
table, use "thumb and finger" type interlock.
g. Not applying shoring loads to existing structures and other
improvements.
h. Not changing existing soil loading on existing structures and
other improvements.
i. Provide welded steel packing between soil retaining members
such as sheet piles and wales and similar members when the
gap exceeds
1/2 inch before the wales are loaded.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings and calculations:
1. In accordance with requirements in CLC for trench excavations 5 feet
or more in depth and for trenches less than 5 feet in depth when there
is potential for cave-in. Submit in advance of excavation work, detailed
drawings showing means for safe and stable excavations:
a. Where such drawings vary from excavation support standards set
forth in California Code of Regulations Title 8 - Construction Safety
Orders, submit design calculations pursuant to general engineering
design practice.
b. Provide means for safe and stable excavations that are not less
effective than required in CCR Title 8 - Construction Safety
Orders.
2. For excavations other than trenches, submit, in advance of excavation
work, design calculations as performed pursuant to general
engineering design practice, as specified in this Section, and detailed
drawing showing means for safe and stable excavations. In design
calculations and detailed drawing, cover, as a minimum:
a. Excavations adjacent to structures and other improvements.
b. Excavations 5 feet or more in depth, or less than 5 feet in depth
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
82
when there is potential for cave-in, at other locations.
3. Submit the following:
a. Provide calculations for the different load, support, and other
conditions that occur during the sequence of installation of
shoring, construction of facilities protected by the shoring, and
sequence of removal of shoring.
b. Provide sketches showing the condition at various stages of
installation and removal of shoring.
c. Show structures, pipelines, and other improvements located
near the shoring, and the shoring on a plan.
d. When utilities penetrate the shoring, submit an elevation of all sides
of the shoring showing the locations of the penetrations.
1) Submit details on ground support and sealing around
utility penetrations.
B. Written geotechnical report on soil characteristics and design
recommendations, as specified in this Section.
C. Control points and schedule of measurements:
1. Submit location and details of control points and method and
schedule of measurements in accordance with requirements of
this Section.
2. Promptly upon constructing control points and making measurements
at such control points, as specified in this Section, submit copy of field
notes with such measurements.
a. The field notes shall show the current measurement and the
change in measurement from the first measurement taken.
D. Detailed sequence of installation and removal of shoring:
1. Consider effects of ground settlement in the sequence of
installation and removal of shoring.
2. Provide sketches showing the conditions at various stages in the
sequence of installation and removal of shoring.
E. Submit submittals for stability of excavations as a complete package and
include all items required in this Section.
1. Incomplete submittals will not be reviewed and will be returned for
resubmittal as a complete package.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. When required to meet with the overall project schedule, implement
additional shoring as necessary.
B. Do not begin work on excavations, trenches, and means for providing
stability of excavation and trenches until submittals have been accepted
by ENGINEER and until materials necessary for installation are on site.
C. Submit submittals a minimum of 30 days prior to the scheduled date to
begin excavation work.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
83
D. Do not begin construction of any shoring or excavation operations until:
1. Control points as specified in this Section and as indicated on the
Drawings on existing structures and other improvements have been
established and surveyed to document initial elevations and locations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
A. Install means for providing safe and stable excavations as indicated
in the submittals.
B. Except for concrete encased soldier piles, slurry walls, and similar shoring
systems, remove shoring by completion of the Work.
1. Select shoring system and method of removal, which will minimize
soil that sticks to shoring from creating large voids and causing
settlement.
2. To prevent settlement caused by pulling shoring, fill voids with
sand, pea gravel, or pressure injected grout.
3. The methods used shall prevent settlement.
4. Pressure preservative treated wood lagging may be left in place
when acceptable to the ENGINEER.
3.2 MAINTENANCE
A. Where loss of soil occurs, plug gap in shoring and replace lost soil with fill
material acceptable to ENGINEER.
B. Where measurements and observations indicate possibility of failure or
excessive movement of excavation support, determined in accordance
with general engineering design practice, take appropriate action
immediately.
3.3 CONTROL POINTS
A. Establish control points on shoring and on structures and other
improvements in vicinity of excavation for measurement of horizontal and
vertical movement:
1. Set control points on shoring support system:
a. Set points at distances not exceeding 25 feet at each support level.
b. Support levels shall be levels of tie-backs, wales, bottom of
excavation, and other types of supports.
2. Set control points on curbs, manholes, and other improvements
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
84
indicated on the Drawings.
B. Provide plumb bobs with horizontal targets indicating original position of
plumb bobs in relation to shoring at control points located on shoring.
C. Perform horizontal and vertical survey and measurement of control points
at least once every week.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
85
SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Loosening, excavating, filling, grading, borrow, hauling, preparing
subgrade, compacting in final location, wetting and drying, and
operations pertaining to site grading for buildings, basins, reservoirs,
boxes, roads, and other facilities.
2. Backfilling and compacting under and around structures.
B. Related sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by
one is as binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility for scheduling and
coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other
individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of
CONTRACTOR’s Work.
3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this
Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience
only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of
the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies
accurately with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 02050 - Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork.
b. Section 02722 – Aggregate Base Course.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C 136 - Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates.
2. D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Sand Cone Method.
3. D 1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700
kN m/m3)).
4. D 6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water
Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth).
5. D 2419 - Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine
Aggregate.
6. D 2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place
by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
7. D 3017 - Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place
by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
8. D 4318 - Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index
of Soils.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
86
B. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
C. State of California Department of Transportation (Caltrans).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill adjacent to structure: Backfill within volume bounded
by the exterior surfaces of structure, the surface of
undisturbed soil in the excavation around structure, and finish
grade around structure.
B. Embankments: Dikes, levees, berms, and similar facilities.
C. Excavation: Consists of loosening, removing, loading,
transporting, depositing, and compacting in final location, wet
and dry materials, necessary to be removed for purposes of
construction of structures, ditches, grading, roads, and such
other purposes as are indicated on the Drawings.
D. In-Place Density of Compacted Backfill: Is density determined in
accordance with ASTM D 1557, or with ASTM D 2922 and ASTM
D 3017.
E. Maximum Density: Is density obtained in laboratory when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 1557.
F. Definitions Related to Compaction of Coarse Fill:
1. One Pass: Defined as one movement of roller over area being
compacted.
2. Measurement Of Pass Width: Measure width of pass between
centers of outside tires or outside edge of roller wheel.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance requirements:
1. Where mud or other soft or unstable material is encountered,
remove such material and refill space with stabilization
material. Wrap stabilization material with stabilization fabric.
2. Obtain acceptable import material from other sources if surplus
obtained within Project site do not conform to specified
requirements or are not sufficient in quantity.
3. No extra compensation will be made for hauling of fill
materials or for water required for compaction.
4. Remove surplus soil from project site.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
87
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Copy of Property OWNER’s Agreement allowing placement
of surplus soil material on their property.
B. Product Data: Submit material source, gradation, and
testing data for all materials, including imported and on-
site materials.
C. Excavation Plan: Submit proposed excavation plan.
D. Testing Lab: Submit CONTRACTOR's proposed
testing laboratory capabilities and equipment.
E. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports of all tests
specified to be performed by the CONTRACTOR. Test
reports shall be signed and sealed by a registered
geotechnical engineer in the State of California.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Initial compaction demonstration:
1. Adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures:
Demonstrate adequacy of compaction equipment and
procedures before exceeding any of following amounts of
earthwork quantities:
a. 50 cubic yards of backfill adjacent to structures.
b. 100 cubic yards of embankment work.
c. 100 cubic yards of fill.
d. 50 cubic yards of roadway base material.
e. 100 cubic yards of road fill.
2. Compaction sequence requirements: Until specified degree of
compaction on previously specified amounts of earthwork is
achieved, do not perform additional earthwork of the same kind.
3. After satisfactory conclusion of initial compaction demonstration
and at any time during construction, provide confirmation tests
as specified under "FIELD QUALITY CONTROL."
B. CONTRACTOR shall perform all work related to this Section
in accordance with the approved Stormwater Pollution
Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and as specified in Section
01570.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule earthwork operations to meet requirements
specified in this Section for excavation and uses of
excavated material.
B. If necessary, stockpile excavated material in order to
use it in specified locations.
C. Excavation and Filling: Perform excavation and filling, during
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
88
construction, in manner and sequence that provides
drainage at all times.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Water for compacting: Use water from source acceptable to
ENGINEER.
B. Soil and rock materials:
1. General:
a. Provide aggregate base course, Class 2 permeable,
controlled low strength material, drain rock, gravel, native
material, sand, select material, and stabilization material
where specified or indicated on the Drawings.
b. If suitable surplus materials are available, obtain native
material and select material from cut sections or
excavations or imported materials.
2. Aggregate base course materials: As specified in Section 02050.
3. Class 2 permeable: As specified in Section 02050.
4. Drain rock: As specified in Section 02050.
5. Gravel: As specified in Section 02050.
6. Native material: As specified in Section 02050.
7. Sand: As specified in Section 02050.
8. Select material: As specified in Section 02050.
9. Stabilization material: As specified in Section 02050.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions:
1. Character and quantity of material:
a. Verify character and quantity of rock, gravel, sand, silt,
water, and other inorganic or organic materials to be
encountered in work to be performed.
b. Determine gradation and shrinkage, and swelling of soil, and
suitability of material for use intended in work to be
performed.
c. Determine quantity of material, and cost thereof, required for
construction of backfills, cuts, embankments, excavations,
fills, and roadway fills, whether from onsite excavations, or
imported materials. Include in cost of work to be performed.
d. Include wasting of excess material, if required, in cost
of work to be performed.
3.2 PREPARATION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
89
A. Backfills:
1. After clearing and excavation are completed, scarify entire areas
that underlie backfills or structures to a depth indicated on the
Drawings and until surface is free of ruts, hummocks, and other
features that would prevent uniform compaction by equipment to
be used.
2. Recompact scarified areas to density specified before placing
backfill material or concrete.
3. Do not place backfill against walls until:
a. Walls have been cast full height of structure and concrete has
reached the specified strength.
Connecting slabs and beams have been cast and concrete
has reached the specified strength.
4. Prior to backfilling:
a. Remove all forms
b. Clean all trash and debris from the excavation site.
5. After inspection of foundation, walls, and pipes, place backfill
symmetrically around structures to prevent eccentric loading
of structures.
B. Embankments:
1. After clearing is completed, scarify entire areas that underlie
embankments to a depth of 9 inches and until surface is free of
ruts, hummocks, and other features that would prevent uniform
compaction by equipment to be used.
2. Recompact scarified areas to density specified for
embankments before placing of embankment material.
C. Fills:
1. After clearing is completed, scarify entire areas that underlie fill
sections or structures to a depth of 9 inches and until surface is
free of ruts, hummocks, and other features that would prevent
uniform compaction by equipment to be used.
2. Recompact scarified areas to density specified for
compacted fills before placing of fill material or concrete.
D. Sloped surfaces for fill or foundations:
1. Foundations for fill having slopes in excess of 1 vertical to 4
horizontal:
a. Bench or terrace to adequately key existing ground and fill built
thereon.
2. Slopes of original hillsides and old fills: Bench minimum of 10
feet horizontally as fill is placed.
3. Provision of new benches:
a. Start new bench wherever vertical cut of next lower
bench intersects existing grade.
b. Recompact material thus cut out along with new
embankment material at no additional cost to the OWNER.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
90
E. Erosion control:
1. Comply with erosion control requirements specified in Sections
02939. 01060 and 01570.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Dispose of excavated materials that are not required or are
unsuitable for fill and backfill in lawful manner.
2. Dispose of surplus material on private property only when written
permission agreement is furnished by owner of property. Submit
copies of such agreements.
3. Rocks, broken concrete, or other solid materials larger than 4 inches in
greatest dimension: Remove from project site at no additional cost to
OWNER.
4. Stabilization of subgrade: Provide materials used, or perform work
required, to stabilize subgrade so it can withstand loads that may be
placed upon it by CONTRACTOR's equipment.
B. Borrow area: There is no designated borrow area on Project site.
1. When additional material is required, import material from source
located off Project site selected by the CONTRACTOR and subject to
acceptance by the ENGINEER.
2. There will be no additional cost to the Contract for use of imported
material.
C. Compaction:
1. Provide specified compaction for backfills, cuts, embankments, fills,
roadway fills, and other earthwork.
2. Perform confirmation tests to verify and confirm that work has complied,
and is complying at all times, with compaction requirements specified in
this Section for initial compaction demonstration and field quality control
testing.
3. In-place density of compacted backfills, cuts, embankments, fills, and
roadway fills determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556, or with
ASTM D 6938.
4. Maximum density obtained in laboratory when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 1557.
5. To prevent damage to structures due to backfilling operations, place
backfill with equipment that does not exceed H-20 loading, within a
distance from the face of the structure of not less than 1/2 the depth of
backfill. The depth of backfill is the distance between the level being
compacted and the bottom of the excavation. Outside this distance,
heavier compaction equipment may be used.
6. Maintain moisture content as necessary to achieve the required
compaction in each lift of material. Place fill derived from on-site
sources with a moisture content of 2 percent above optimum.
7. Remove fill material that is soft or yielding and replace with
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
91
properly compacted fill material prior to placing the next lift of
material.
8. Compact to percentage of maximum density as follows:
a. Backfill adjacent to structures and retaining walls: 90 percent.
b. Backfilling voids: 95 percent.
c. Embankments: Compact embankment fill to at least 90-
percent relative compaction in non-pavement areas.
Compact embankment fill to at least 95 percent relative
compaction where fill is placed within 3 feet of finished grade
in pavement areas.
d. Other areas: 90 percent.
e. Under structures:
1) Aggregate base course: 95 percent.
2) Scarified, moisture conditioned native material: 90 percent.
f. Under roadways, parking and storage areas, curbs,
and sidewalks: 95 percent.
g. Upper 9 inches of cuts: 90 percent.
h. General Fills: 90 percent unless noted otherwise.
D. Excavation:
1. Blasting: Not permitted.
2. Excavations for structures:
a. Provide excavations conforming to dimensions and
elevations indicated on the Drawings for each structure,
including trenching for piping and all work incidental
thereto.
b. After clearing is complete, excavate for the structure, down
to the elevation indicated on the Drawings. Unless directed
by ENGINEER, do not carry excavations below elevation
indicated on the Drawings.
c. Where soil is encountered having unsuitable bearing value,
ENGINEER may direct in writing that excavation be carried
to elevations below those indicated on the Drawings.
d. Where excavations are made below elevations indicated on
the Drawings, adjust elevations of excavations in accordance
with the following requirements:
1) Under slabs: Restore to proper elevation in
accordance with procedure specified for backfill
in this Section.
2) Under footings: Restore to the proper elevation
using one of the following:
a) Aggregate base-course, unless otherwise specified or
indicated on the Drawings.
e. Excavation width:
1) Extend excavations at least 5 feet clear from walls and
foundations of structures to allow for placing and
removal of forms, installation of services, and inspection.
2) Do not undercut slopes.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
92
f. Difficulty of excavation: No extra compensation will be
made for removal of rock or any other material due to
difficulty of excavation.
3. Excavation of unlined channels and basins:
a. Excavate to lines and grades indicated on the Drawings.
b. Perform excavation and grading so that finish surfaces
are in uniform planes with no abrupt breaks in surface.
4. Excavation of ditches and gutters:
a. Cut ditches and gutters accurately to cross sections and
grades indicated on the Drawings.
b. Take care not to excavate ditches and gutters below grades
indicated on
the Drawings.
c. Backfill excessive ditch and gutter excavations to grade with
suitable material acceptable to ENGINEER that is thoroughly
compacted.
d. Do not deposit any material within 3 feet of edge of ditch unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
5. Necessary over excavation:
a. Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond normal lines of
excavation in order to remove boulders or other interfering objects,
backfill voids remaining after removal as specified in backfilling of
voids below, or as acceptable to the ENGINEER.
b. Backfill voids with material acceptable to the ENGINEER:
1) With acceptance of the ENGINEER, backfill with one of the
following:
a) Aggregate base course.
E. Materials for backfills, embankments, fills, roadway fills:
1. General:
a. Obtain import material from other sources if surplus materials
from cuts and excavations obtained from within Project site do
not conform to specified requirements or are not sufficient in
quantity for construction of Project.
2. Backfills:
a. Backfill adjacent to structures, slabs, or walls: As indicated
on the Drawings.
b. Backfill material under concrete structures: Aggregate base
course material, except in areas where controlled low
strength material or concrete encasement are indicated on
the Drawings.
c. Extend backfill in any area under concrete structures from
scarified, recompacted, and moisture conditioned native
material to the bottom aggregate base course material layer.
3. Embankments:
a. Native material unless otherwise specified or indicated on the
Drawings.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
93
4. Fills:
a. Native material, or unless otherwise specified or indicated
on the Drawings.
b. Extend fill in any area under concrete structures from
undisturbed soil or rock to the bottom aggregate base course
material layer.
5. Roadway fills:
a. Aggregate base course material, unless otherwise specified or
indicated on the Drawings.
F. Placement:
1. General:
a. Lines and grades:
1) Construct backfills, embankments, fills, and road fills, at
locations and to lines and grades indicated on the
Drawings.
2) Overbuild all permanent fill slopes by at least 1 foot and
then cut to final grade to provide adequate compaction of
the remaining fill.
2. Backfills:
a. Place loose material in successive layers that do not
exceed 8 inches in depth after compaction.
b. Bring each layer to a moisture content between optimum
moisture content and 2 percent above optimum moisture
content before compacting.
c. Defective compacted backfills: Remove and recompact.
3. Fills:
a. Place loose material in successive layers that do not
exceed 8 inches in depth after compaction.
b. Bring each layer to a moisture content between optimum
moisture content and 2 percent above optimum moisture
content before compacting.
c. Defective compacted fills: Remove and recompact.
4. Embankments:
a. Place loose material in successive layers that do not
exceed 8 inches in depth after compaction.
b. Bring each layer to a moisture content between optimum
moisture content and 2 percent above optimum moisture
content before compacting.
c. Defective compacted embankments: Remove and recompact.
5. Roadway fills:
a. Place loose material in successive layers that do not
exceed 8 inches in depth after compaction:
b. Bring each layer to a moisture content between optimum
moisture content and 2 percent above optimum moisture
content before compacting.
c. Defective compacted roadway fills: Remove and recompact.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
94
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
1. Compliance tests:
a. Periodic compliance tests will be made by the ENGINEER
to verify that compaction is meeting requirements
previously specified.
b. Remove overburden above level at which the ENGINEER
wishes to test. Backfill and recompact excavation after
testing is completed.
c. If compaction fails to meet specified requirements, perform
remedial work by one of the following methods:
1) Remove and replace materials at proper density.
2) Bring density up to specified level by other means
acceptable to the ENGINEER.
d. Retesting:
1) CONTRACTOR bears the costs of retesting required
to confirm and verify that remedial work has brought
compaction within specified requirements.
B. Tolerances:
1. Finish grading of backfills, cuts, embankments, fills, and roadway fills:
a. Perform fine grading under concrete structures such that
finish surfaces are never above the grade or cross section
indicated on the Drawings and are never more than 0.10
feet below.
b. Provide finish surface for areas outside of structures that are within
0.10 feet of grade or cross section indicated on the Drawings.
2. Unlined channels and basins:
a. In both cut and fill, and levee and access road side slopes in cut:
Vertical tolerance of none above and 3 inches below grade
indicated on the Drawings on bottom and side slopes.
b. On top surface of levee and access road in both cut and fill, and
levee and access road side slopes in fill: Vertical tolerance of none
below and 3 inches above grade indicated on the Drawings.
3. Areas which are not under structures, concrete, asphalt, roads,
pavements, sidewalks, dikes, and similar facilities:
a. Provide finish graded surfaces of either undisturbed soil, or
cohesive material not less than 6 inches deep.
b. Intent of proceeding is to avoid sandy or gravelly areas.
4. Finish grading of surfaces:
a. Reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface
changes.
b. Provide degree of finish that is ordinarily obtainable from blade
grader operations, except as otherwise specified.
c. Uniformly grade areas that are not under concrete.
d. Finish ditches and gutters so that they drain readily.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
95
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Finish grades of excavations, backfills, and fills:
1. Repair and reestablish grades to required elevations and slopes due to
any settlement or erosion that may occur from action of the elements
or any other cause prior to final acceptance.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Finish grades of backfills, cuts, excavations, and fills:
1. Protect newly graded areas from erosion and deterioration by action
of the elements.
B. Ditches and gutters:
1. Maintain ditches and gutters free from detrimental quantities of
debris that might inhibit drainage until final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
96
SECTION 02318 TRENCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Trench excavation, fine grading, pipe bedding,
backfilling, and compaction for the following, including requirements for
ditch crossings:
1. Pipes.
2. Direct buried electrical and control conduits.
3. Electrical and control duct banks.
4. Manholes, valves, or other accessories.
5. Potable water pipe appurtenances.
B. Related sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by
one is as binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility for scheduling and
coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other
individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR’s
Work.
3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section.
This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not
intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the
CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 02050 - Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork.
b. Section 02260 - Excavation Support and Protection.
c. Section 02300 - Earthwork.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Sand Cone Method.
2. D 1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-
m/m3)).
3. D 6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content
of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Lab certification.
B. Confirmation test reports.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
97
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Initial compaction demonstration:
1. Adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures:
Demonstrate adequacy of compaction equipment and
procedures before exceeding any of following amounts of
earthwork quantities:
a. 200 linear feet of trench backfill.
2. Compaction sequence requirements: Until specified degree
of compaction on previously specified amounts of earthwork
is achieved, do not perform additional earthwork of the
same kind.
3. After satisfactory conclusion of initial compaction
demonstration and at any time during construction, provide
confirmation tests as specified under "FIELD QUALITY
CONTROL."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Provide material having maximum particle size not exceeding 4 inches
and that is free of leaves, grass, roots, stumps, and other vegetable
matter.
2. Materials derived from processing demolished or removed asphalt
concrete are not acceptable.
B. Soil and rock materials:
1. Aggregate base course material: As specified in Section 02050.
2. Gravel: As specified in Section 02050.
3. Native material: As specified in Section 02050.
4. Sand: As specified in Section 02050.
5. Select material: As specified in Section 02050.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Exists where width of trench exceeds limits specified in this Section.
2. Before laying pipes in fill, place fill and compact it to not
less than 2 feet above top of pipe.
a. After placing and compacting fill, excavate pipe trench through fill.
B. Protection: Stabilize trench excavations as specified in Section 02260.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
98
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Trench excavation:
1. General requirements:
a. If, because of soil conditions, safety requirements, or other
reasons, trench width at top of pipe is increased beyond
width specified in this Section, upgrade laying conditions or
install stronger pipe designed in conformance with
Specifications for increased trench width, without additional
cost to OWNER.
b. Excavate bottom of trench to depth indicated on the
Drawings. The bottom of the trench excavation shall be firm
and dry.
2. The trench may be excavated by machinery to the grade indicated on
the Drawings provided that the soil material remaining in the bottom
of the trench is no more than slightly disturbed.
3. Rock:
a. Pipe: If bottom of trench excavation is found to consist of rock or
any material that by reason of its hardness cannot be excavated
to provide uniform bearing surface, remove such rock or other
material to a depth of not less than 4 inches below bottom of fine
grading material. Backfill overcut with aggregate base course
material compacted to 95 percent of maximum density up to
bottom of fine grading material.
b. Direct buried electrical and control conduits: If bottom of trench
excavation is found to consist of rock or any material that by
reason of its hardness cannot be excavated to provide uniform
bearing surface, remove such rock or other material to a depth of
not less than 4 inches below bottom of conduit bedding material.
Backfill overcut with aggregate base course material up to bottom
of conduit bedding material.
c. Electrical and control duct banks: If bottom of trench excavation is
found to consist of rock or any material that by reason of its
hardness cannot be excavated to provide uniform bearing surface,
remove such rock or other material to a depth of not less than 4
inches below bottom of concrete duct bank. Backfill overcut with
aggregate base course material up to bottom of concrete duct
bank.
4. Overcut of trench bottom: Where the bottom of the trench is excavated
below the depth indicated on the Drawings, restore trench bottom to
proper grade by back filling with aggregate base course material
compacted to 95 percent of maximum density, at no additional cost to
OWNER.
5. Soft or unstable material:
a. If bottom of excavation is found to consist of soft or unstable
material that is incapable of providing proper support, remove
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
99
such material to a depth and for the length required, as
determined by the ENGINEER. Backfill trench to bottom of fine
grading material with coarse aggregate for trench stabilization
material. Coarse aggregate shall be encased using stabilization
fabric.
6. Trench widths:
a. Minimum clear width of trench for pipe (measured at top of pipe):
1) For pipe sizes 4 inches to and including 24 inches: Not
less than outside diameter of pipe plus 18 inches.
2) For pipe sizes larger than 24 inches: Not less than outside
diameter of pipe plus 24 inches.
b. Maximum clear width of trench for pipe (measured at top of pipe):
1) For pipe sizes 4 inches to and including 24 inches: Not to
exceed outside diameter of pipe plus 24 inches.
2) For pipe sizes larger than 24 inches: Not to exceed outside
diameter of pipe plus 36 inches.
7. For manholes, valves, or other accessories:
a. Provide excavations sufficient to leave at least 12 inches clear
between their outer surfaces and sides of trench or shoring.
b. Backfilling of manhole excavation: Conform to backfilling
requirements as specified for trenches in this Section.
c. Backfill under manholes, vaults, tanks, or valves with
aggregate base course material. Do not backfill with soil.
d. Fill any unauthorized excess excavation below elevation
indicated on the Drawings for foundation of any structure with
aggregate base course material at no additional cost to OWNER.
8. Potable water pipe appurtenances:
a. Lay in trenches separate from those used for sewers.
b. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, lay in
trenches having cover of not less than 3 feet below surface of
ground and located at distance of not less than 10 feet from any
parallel sewer or Plant Drain trench.
9. At road crossings or existing driveways:
a. Make provision for trench crossings at these points, either by
means of backfills, tunnels, or temporary bridges.
B. Pipe fine grading:
1. Schedule fine grading material as specified in this Section.
2. For pipes 16 inches in nominal diameter and under.
a. Place 6 inches of fine grading material below bottom of pipe.
b. Place fine grading material at uniform density, with minimum
possible compaction.
3. For pipe over 16 inches in diameter.
a. Place 6 inches, or 1/12 the outside diameter of pipe, whichever is
greater, of fine grading material below bottom of pipe.
b. Place fine grading material at uniform density, with minimum
possible compaction.
4. Bell or coupling holes:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
100
a. Dig holes after trench bottom has been graded.
b. Provide holes of sufficient width to provide ample room for
grouting, banding, or welding.
c. Excavate holes only as necessary for making joints and to ensure
that pipe rests upon prepared trench bottom and not supported by
any portion of the joint.
5. Depressions for joints, other than bell-and-spigot:
a. Make in accordance with recommendations of joint
manufacturer for particular joint used.
C. Pipe bedding:
1. Schedule bedding material as specified in this Section.
2. After pipe laid:
a. Place bedding material under and around pipe in 6-inch
maximum lifts of bedding material, to level 12 inches above top of
pipe. Compact to
90 percent of maximum density.
3. Pipe displacement:
a. Take necessary precautions in placement and compaction of
bedding material to prevent displacement of piping.
b. In event there is movement or floating of the piping, re-excavate,
re-lay, and backfill the pipe.
D. Trench backfill above pipe bedding, electrical and control conduit
bedding, and electrical and control duct banks:
1. Under structures:
a. Backfill trench up to underside of structure with aggregate base
course material as specified in Section 02050 compacted to 95
percent of maximum density or controlled low-strength material
as specified in Section 02312.
2. Cuts across roadways and paved streets:
a. Backfill trench to underside of pavement with aggregate base
course material as specified in Section 02050 compacted to
95 percent of maximum density or controlled low-strength
material as specified in Section 02312.
3. Under and parallel to roadways, paved areas, or storage areas:
a. Backfill trench up to within 2 feet of finish grade with native
material compacted to 95 percent of maximum density.
b. Then backfill from 2 feet below finish grade to finish grade, or
underside of aggregate base course or pavement as indicated on
the Drawings with aggregate base course material as specified in
Section 02050, compacted to 95 percent of maximum density or
controlled low-strength material as specified in Section 02312.
4. In areas outside the improved section of roadways or in open country:
a. Backfill to finish grade with native material as specified in
Section 02050 compacted to 95 percent of maximum density.
5. Through earth slopes adjacent to, or supporting structures:
a. Backfill to finish grade with aggregate base course material
or select material compacted to 95 percent of maximum
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
101
density.
E. Under existing intersecting pipes or conduits larger than 3 inches in diameter:
1. Backfill from bottom of new pipe trench to spring line of intersecting
pipe or conduit with aggregate base course material, as specified in
Section 02050, compacted to 90 percent of maximum density or
controlled low-strength material as specified in Section 02312.
2. Extend aggregate base course material as specified in Section 02050,
or controlled low-strength material as specified in Section 02312, 2
feet on either side of intersecting pipe or conduit to ensure that
material remains in place while other backfill is being placed.
3. Backfill remainder of trench as specified in “Trench backfill above pipe
bedding, electrical and control conduit bedding, and electrical and
control duct banks” above.
F. Compaction:
1. In-place density of compacted trench backfill, and bedding
determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556, or with ASTM D
6938.
2. Maximum density obtained in laboratory when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 1557.
3. Consolidation:
a. Do not use water-settling methods such as flooding, poling, or
jetting.
G. Excess material:
1. Remove excess excavated material from the Project site as
specified in Section 02300 and dispose of legally off site.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
1. Confirmation Tests:
a. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1) Accomplish specified compaction of trench backfill.
2) Control operations by confirmation tests to verify and
confirm that compaction work complies, and is
complying at all times, with requirements specified in
this Section concerning compaction, control, and
testing.
3) Cost of Confirmation Tests: Paid for by the
CONTRACTOR.
4) Qualifications of Contractor's Testing
Laboratory: Provide lab certification.
5) Copies of Confirmation Test Reports: Submit
promptly to the ENGINEER.
b. Frequency of Confirmation Testing:
1) Perform testing not less than as follows:
a) For Trenches: At each test location include tests
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
102
for each type or class of backfill from bedding to
finish grade.
b) In Open Fields: Two every 1,000 linear feet.
c) Along Dirt or Gravel Road or off Traveled Right-of-
way: Two every 500 linear feet.
d) Crossing Paved Roads: Two locations along each
crossing.
e) Under Pavement Cuts or Within 2 Feet of
Pavement Edges: One location every 400 linear
feet.
2. Compliance Tests:
a. Frequency of Testing: Periodic compliance tests will be made by
the ENGINEER to verify that compaction is meeting requirements
previously specified.
b. For Tests in Water Settled Backfill: Remove overburden above
level at which the ENGINEER wishes to test. Backfill and
recompact excavation after testing is completed.
c. If Compaction Fails to Meet Specified Requirements: Perform
remedial work by one of the following methods:
1) Remove and replace backfill at proper density.
2) Bring density up to specified level by other means
acceptable to the ENGINEER.
d. Retesting:
1) Costs of Retesting: Costs of retesting required to
confirm and verify that remedial work has brought
compaction within specified requirements shall be
borne by the CONTRACTOR.
2) Contractor's Confirmation Tests During Performance of
Remedial Work:
a) Performance: Perform tests in manner
acceptable to the ENGINEER.
b) Frequency: Double amount specified for initial
confirmation tests.
3.4 SCHEDULES
A. Pipe fine grading materials:
1. Fine grading material shall be the same as bedding material.
B. Bedding materials:
1. Pipes:
a. For pipe less than 16-inch nominal size: Except as otherwise
specified, use sand.
b. For pipe from 16- inch to 48-inch nominal size: Except as
otherwise specified, use sand.
c. For pipe over 48 inches: Aggregate base course material.
d. For polyvinyl chloride or other plastic pipe less than 2 inches in
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
103
diameter: Sand.
2. Direct buried electrical and control conduits: Sand.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
104
SECTION 02820 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Fence, framework, fabric, and accessories.
2. Excavation for post bases and concrete foundation for posts.
3. Manual sliding gates and related hardware.
B. Related sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called
for by one is as binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility for scheduling and
coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other
individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of
CONTRACTOR’s Work.
3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this
Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise
diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR to see that the
completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 121 - Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel
Barbed Wire.
2. A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
3. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
Iron and Steel Hardware.
4. A 385 - Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc
Coatings (Hot-Dip).
5. A 392 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link
Fence Fabric.
6. A 702 - Standard Specification for Steel Fence Posts and
Assemblies, Hot- Wrought.
7. F 626 - Standard Specification for Fence Fittings.
8. F 668 - Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and
Other Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric.
9. F 1043 - Standard Specification for Strength and Protective
Coatings on Steel Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework.
10. F 1184 - Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial
Horizontal Slide Gates.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
105
B. State of California Department of Transportation (Caltrans).
C. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute:
1. CLFMI - Product Manual.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide temporary fences and gates in accordance with Section 01520.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Submit data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and
hardware.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation
dimensions, hardware anchorage, gates, and schedule of
components.
C. Quality control submittals:
1. Certificates of compliance: Provide certification that
materials conform to referenced specifications.
2. Qualifications: Provide installer's references and list of local references.
3. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Submit installation requirements.
D. Closeout Submittals:
1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record
actual locations of property perimeter posts relative
to property lines.
2. Operation and maintenance Data: Procedures for submittals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre-installation conference: Participate in conference, if required.
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM F567.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and handling: Unload, store, and protect materials such
that they are not damaged.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field measurements:
1. Verify actual field distances so that post spacing can be made uniform.
2. Verify and coordinate gate opening and access to site.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall guarantee that the materials and/or the
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
106
workmanship of the equipment supplied be free of defects for a
period of 5 years from the date of acceptance or date of first
beneficial use of the equipment by OWNER, whichever is later.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Chain link fence and gates: One of the following or equal:
1. Master-Halco.
2. Allied Tube and Conduit.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Chain link fence:
1. Fabric:
a. Height:
1) Plant Fence: 6 feet 0 inch.
b. Mesh: 2 inches for all fence without privacy slats.
c. Size wire: 9 gauge.
1) Coating: Zinc coating, ASTM A 392, Class 1.
2) Tensile strength: 80,000 pounds per square inch minimum.
2. Framework: In accordance with ASTM F 1043 Group 1A or 1C.
Pipe shall be straight and conform to the following weights:
Pipe Size
Outside Diameter
(Inches)
Group IA
Weight
(Lbs/ft)
Group IC
Weight
(Lbs/ft)
1-5/8 2.27 1.84
1-7/8 2.72 2.28
2-3/8 3.65 3.12
2-7/8 5.79 4.64
3-1/2 7.58 5.71
4 9.11 6.56
6-5/8 18.97 -
8-5/8 24.70 -
a. Top rail:
1) Size: 1-5/8 inches outside diameter.
2) Tension wire: 7-gauge galvanized coil spring wire.
b. Line posts:
1) Size: 2-3/8-inch outside diameter.
c. Terminal, corner, and pull posts:
1) Size: 2-7/8-inch outside diameter.
d. Coatings:
1) Group IA: External coatings in accordance with ASTM F 1043
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
107
Type A; internal coatings in accordance with ASTM F 1043 Type A.
2) Group IC: External coatings in accordance with ASTM F 1043
Type B; internal coatings in accordance with ASTM F 1043 Type D.
3. Accessories:
a. Fence fittings: In accordance with ASTM F 626.
1) Post top fittings:
a) Provide post caps that fit snugly over posts to exclude
moisture. Provide dome style caps for terminal posts
and loop style caps for line posts.
2) Rail and brace ends: Provide pressed steel or malleable
castings that are cup shaped to receive rail and brace ends.
b. Fabric accessories:
1) Wire clips: Minimum 6 gauge hot-dip galvanized.
2) Tension bars: 1/4 inch by 3/4 inch, galvanized.
3) Steel bands: 11 gauge, 1 inch wide, hot-dip galvanized.
4) Bolts and nuts: 3/8-inch diameter.
5) Hog rings: 11 gauge.
B. Chain link gates:
1. Gate posts and concrete foundations for gate posts: Except
where differently indicated on the Drawings, determine gate
posts and concrete foundations for gate posts in accordance
with following schedule:
Gate Leaf
Widths
(Feet)
Gate Posts Foundations
Post O.D.
ASTM F 1043 Group IA or IC
(Inches)
Diameter
(Inches)
Depth
(Feet)
0 to 6 2-7/8 12 4
Over 6 to 13 4 18 3
Over 13 to 18 6-5/8 (Group IA) 18 4
Over 18 to 25 8-5/8 (Group IA) 18 4.5
2. Chain link gates:
a. Located as shown on the Drawings.
b. Frames and center supports: 1-7/8-inch outside diameter
galvanized steel pipe that is in accordance with ASTM F
1043 Group IA or IC.
c. Gate accessories:
1) Post top fittings:
a) Provide post caps that fit snugly over posts to
exclude moisture.
b) Provide dome style caps for terminal posts and
loop style caps for line posts.
2) Corner fittings: Heavy pressed steel or malleable
castings.
3) Gate tensioning:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
108
a) Cross tensioning rods: 3/8 inch, galvanized.
b) Turnbuckles: Heavy duty.
4) Tension rods for 4-foot gates: 3/8 inch, easily adjustable,
galvanized.
5) Gate frame corner fittings: Fitting designed
for purpose, Manufacturer's standard.
6) Horizontal gate stiffeners: 1-7/8-inch outside
diameter galvanized steel pipe that in accordance
with ASTM F 1043 Group IA or IC.
7) Gate hardware:
a) Catch and locking attachment: Combination steel
or malleable iron catch and locking attachment of
acceptable design.
b) Stops:
(1) Type 1: Capable of holding gates open.
(2) Type 2: Center rest with catch.
c) Color: Match color of fabric.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Shop finishing:
1. Fences and chain link gates:
a. Galvanizing: For items not fabricated of galvanized
materials hot-dip galvanize products after fabrication in
accordance with following as applicable:
1) ASTM A 123.
2) ASTM A 153.
3) ASTM A 385.
b. Mark galvanized products with name of galvanize,
applicable ASTM designation, and weight of zinc
coating.
c. Galvanize fabricated items complete, or in largest practicable
sections.
d. Provide galvanizing at rate of 2.0 ounces per square foot,
minimum.
e. Hardware:
1) Padlocks: Cadmium plated.
2) Chain: Galvanized.
f. Field finish touch-up painting:
1) Galvanized repair paint: Apply paint having
minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 to 3.5 mils.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Verify field conditions prior to construction.
3.2 PREPARATION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
109
A. Surface preparation:
1. Before locating fence posts grade ground to permit grade of fence to
remain constant over any local elevations or depressions in ground
line.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Chain link fences and gates:
1. General:
a. Install chain link fence and gates as indicated on the
Drawings and specified in this Section.
b. Provide fence systems that are plumb, taut, true to line and
grade, and complete in all details.
c. Install fencing to generally follow finish grade of ground and
provide pull posts at points where required to conform to change
in grade.
d. Install fencing such that space between bottom of fence and finish
ground line does not exceed 3 inches.
2. Concrete foundation for fence posts:
a. Set fence posts in concrete foundations, that extend at least 3
feet into ground, and space posts not over 10 feet apart.
b. Provide concrete foundations having minimum of 10 inches in
diameter for line posts and 12 inches in diameter for corners
and gates.
c. Provide foundations that extend minimum of 1 inch above
finish grade and have tops that are shaped to slope to drain
away from posts.
d. Trowel finish tops of footings, and slope or dome to direct
water away from posts.
e. Set keepers, stops, sleeves, tracks, eye bolts, and other
accessories into concrete as required.
f. Wheel rolling area for sliding gates shall be steel-trowel
smooth finish concrete.
3. Post bracing:
a. End corner, pull, and gate posts: Brace with same material as
top rail and trussed to line posts with 3/8-inch rods and
tighteners.
b. Bracing end, corner, slope, and gate posts:
1) Brace to midpoint of nearest line post or posts with
horizontal braces used as compression members.
2) Then from such line posts truss from brace back to
bottom of end, corner, slope, or gate post with 3/8-inch
steel truss rods with turnbuckles or other suitable
tightening devices used as tension members.
4. Top rail:
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings,
install fencing with top rail and bottom tension wire. An
additional 2 foot high barbed wire topping shall be installed
to match the existing conditions.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
110
5. Fabric:
a. Place fabric on outward facing side of the posts and install
so that top edge projects over top rail of fence.
b. Stretch fabric taut and securely fasten to posts, top rail,
and bottom tension wire.
c. Install tension wire parallel to line of fabric.
d. Fabric: Connect fabric to:
1) Line posts with wire clips minimum every 14 inches.
2) Terminal, corner, and gate posts with tension bars tied
to posts minimum 14 inches on center and with steel
bands and bolts and nuts.
3) Tension wires with hog rings minimum 24 inches on center.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch.
C. Components shall not infringe adjacent property lines.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's field service: Manufacturer shall check and test all
powered gates and accessories before acceptance.
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 Adjust gate travel, stops, and operator position to meet field
conditions.CLEANING
A. Clean up surplus dirt, concrete, and other waste material and dress grade
up upon completion of the work.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed fences and gates against damage and, if damaged, repair
prior to final acceptance.
END OF
SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
111
SECTION 02939 SEEDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Seeding.
2. Hydromulching.
3. Erosion-control material(s).
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Association of Official Seed Analysts (AOSA).
B. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA).
C. United States Environment Protection Agency (EPA).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Duff layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly
decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.
B. Finish grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
C. Manufactured topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending
mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce
topsoil or planting soil.
D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying,
repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides,
herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes
substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or
desiccant.
E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause
damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs,
mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted
plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
F. Planting soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing,
in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is
modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil
mixture best for plant growth.
G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is
complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
112
H. Surface soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil
profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is
typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the
surface soil can be subsoil.
I. Weeds: Includes Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning
Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress,
Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Russian Thistle, Leafy Spurge, Nutgrass,
Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson
Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Weed, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild
Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass, and all weeds listed on the
San Luis Obispo County website:
1. http://www.slocounty.ca.gov/agcomm/Weed_Control/SLO_County_s_Wee
d_M anagement_Area/Invasive_Weeds_of_SLO_County.htm.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: For each type of product indicated.
1. Pesticides and herbicides: Include product label and
manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project.
2. Fertilizer and organic matter: Include product label and
manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project.
3. Soil amendment: Analysis.
B. Certification of grass seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed
monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage
by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity,
germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of
packaging.
1. Certification and inspection as required by governmental authorities of
the seed mixture defined in Article 2.01 of this Specification. Include
identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier.
C. Qualification data: For qualified landscape Installer.
D. Samples: Imported topsoil, organic matter, erosion control blanket, and mulch.
E. Product certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer.
F. Maintenance instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by
OWNER for maintenance of turf and meadows during a calendar year.
Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has
resulted in successful turf and meadow establishment.
1. Professional membership: Installer shall be a member in good
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
113
standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the
American Nursery and Landscape Association.
2. Experience: 5 years’ successful experience in the installation of seeded
areas similar in size to this project.
3. Installer's field supervision: Require Installer to maintain an
experienced full- time supervisor on Project site when work is in
progress.
4. Personnel certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have
certification in all of the following categories from the Professional
Landcare Network:
a. Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation and
irrigation specialty area(s).
5. Maintenance proximity: Not more than 2 hours' normal travel
time from Installer's place of business to Project site.
6. Pesticide applicator: State licensed, commercial.
B. Soil-testing laboratory qualifications: An independent laboratory or university
laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the
experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that
specializes in types of tests to be performed.
C. Soil analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a
written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of
organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange
capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and
plant-nutrient content of the soil. Refer to plan notes for number and
location of soil analysis tests.
1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with
USDA's Handbook No. 60.
2. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth,
location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from
ENGINEER.
a. A minimum of 3 representative samples shall be taken from
varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for
planting purposes.
3. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth.
a. Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil
treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated.
1) State recommendations in weight per 1,000 square feet or
volume per cubic yard for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash
nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce
satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.
b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals,
including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt,
lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present,
provide additional recommendations for corrective action.
D. Pre-installation conference: Conduct conference at project site.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
114
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Seed and other packaged materials:
1. Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing
weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and
indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.
2. Protect seed during delivery and storage.
3. Seed that has become wet or otherwise damaged will not be acceptable.
B. Deliver packaged materials in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical
analysis and name or trademark of manufacturer.
1. Provide seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix,
year of production, net weight, date of packaging, percentage of purity
(PLS), percentage of germination and location of packaging.
C. Local sourcing of seed not in sealed containers is permitted for smaller
projects.
D. Bulk materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities,
walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.
2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement
of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne
dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or
walkways.
3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime, and soil
amendments with appropriate certificates.
E. Truck receipts: For verification of all soil amendments and imported topsoil.
1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Planting restrictions: Plant during 1 of the following periods. Coordinate
planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required
maintenance from date.
1. Non-irrigated seed areas: Seed from November to March in order
to take advantage of rain.
B. Coordinate with CONTRACTOR’s work requiring access to site over
existing vegetation areas.
1. No trucking or moving of equipment or materials shall be
permitted over completed seed areas.
C. Coordinate with installation of all underground system piping and outlets.
D. Weather limitations:
1. Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and
optimum results may be obtained.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
115
2. Apply products during favorable weather conditions
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty:
1. Guarantee all seeding to be alive and healthy for 2 years following date
of final completion by the ENGINEER.
2. Seeded areas shall have an even stand of grass with
germination, over 100 percent of the site within 45 days of
seeding.
3. All seeded grass areas are to be assured of obtaining a satisfactory
stand of growth.
4. The total area occupied by bare spots larger than 0.25 square feet
must not exceed 10 percent of the total seeded area.
5. Maximum single bare spot size of irrigated seed 3 inches by 3 inches.
6. Maximum single bare spot size of non-irrigated seed is 1 square foot.
7. All seeded grass areas that do not meet the satisfactory stand of
growth qualification shall be reseeded and mulched.
B. Replace seeding when it is no longer in a satisfactory condition or do not
meet the preceding standard as determined by the ENGINEER or the
duration of the Guarantee/Warranty Period.
1. Make replacements as soon as possible within the recommended
seeding schedule.
C. Replacements:
1. Seed of same mix, quality, and species as originally specified, as
soon as possible within the recommended seeding schedule, with
a new 1-year warranty commencing on date of replacement.
2. Repairs and replacements shall be made at no expense to the OWNER.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEED
A. Grass seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA’s
“Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds” for purity and
germination tolerances.
B. Seed species:
1. Seed of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent
germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than
0.5 percent weed seed.
Hydroseed Species for LOWRF
Species
Common Name
Application
Rate (lbs/acre)
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
116
Festuca Rubra “Molate” Molate Native Red Fescue 14
Calandrina Ciliata Red Maids 2
Deschampsia Elongatum Slender Hairgrass 6
Deschampsia Cespitosa Tufted Hairgrass 6
Eschscholzia Californica Cailfornia Poppy 3
Koelaria Macrantha Junegrass 6
Lupine Nanus Sky Lupine 4
Melica Californica California Oniongrass 5
2. The percentage of material, other than grass seed in the mixture,
shall not include more than 18 percent non-viable seed, chaff, hulls,
live seed of crop plants (other than those specified), harmless inert
matter.
C. Proprietary seed mix can be made at S&S Seeds, Carpinteria, CA
or other approved seed source:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements. Provide seed
mixes per seed as indicated on the Drawings.
2.2 WATER
A. Clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous
growth of grass.
2.3 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Soil amendments and fertilizer shall be applied as indicated on the Drawings
unless imported topsoil is used.
1. Soil amendment and fertilizer recommendations, along with supporting
soil test analysis, shall be submitted to and approved by the ENGINEER
prior to application on the site.
2.4 FERTILIZERS
A. Uniform in composition, free flowing and suitable for application with
approved equipment, of the proportions necessary to eliminate any
deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated in analysis.
1. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site fully labeled according 10
applicable state fertilizer laws and shall bear the name, tradename,
trademark and warranty of the provider.
B. As indicated on the Drawings and notes.
2.5 PLANTING SOILS
A. Topsoil: Fertile soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant
growth, taken from drained site; free of subsoil, stones over 1 inch in
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
117
diameter, clay clumps, or impurities, plants weeds and roots; pH value of
minimum 6.5 and maximum 7.5.
B. Stockpiled on-site topsoil free of subsoil, stones over 1 inch in
diameter, clay clumps, or impurities, plants, weeds and roots.
2.6 MULCHES
A. Mulching material:
1. Straw mulch:
a. Straw of oats, barley, wheat, or rye only.
b. Straw shall be free from weeds, foreign matter detrimental to
plant life, and dry. 50 percent of straw shall be minimum 10
inches long.
c. Hay or chopped cornstalks are not acceptable.
d. Straw in such an advanced stage of decomposition as to
smother or retard the normal growth of grass will not be
accepted.
e. Old straw mulch that breaks during crimping will not be accepted.
2. Wood cellulose fiber mulch:
a. Wood cellulose fiber mulch, containing no substance or factor that
might inhibit germination or growth of grass seed, with organic
tackifier.
b. Wood fibers must be capable of being evenly dispersed and
suspended when agitated in water.
c. Furnish dyed wood cellulose fiber with green color to allow visual
metering of its application.
3. As indicated on the Drawings.
B. Erosion control blanket:
1. Jute matting, open weave.
2. Excelsior erosion control blankets or approved equal:
a. Regular blanket, machine produced mat of curled wood excelsior of
80 percent 6 inch or longer fiber length with a consistent width of
fibers evenly distributed throughout mat; a photo-biodegradable
extruded plastic netting shall cover the top side of blanket.
b. Netting shall be secured to wood excelsior by extra heavy lines of
plastic woven into the width of each blanket.
c. Blanket shall be smolder resistant with no chemical additives.
3. As indicated on the Drawings.
C. Herbicide and pesticide: Submit labels for approval.
D. Stakes: Softwood lumber, chisel pointed.
2.7 PESTICIDES
A. General:
1. Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
118
each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and
application.
2. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Pre-emergent herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for
controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the
soil level directly below the mulch layer.
C. Post-emergent herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for
controlling weed growth that has already germinated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint,
paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement,
plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing
compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.
2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or
muddy conditions.
3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of
excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable
levels to attain the required results.
4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which
is too dusty.
B. Start of work covered in this Section constitutes CONTRACTOR’s
approval of all existing site conditions.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil
within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by the
ENGINEER and replace with new planting soil.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect existing and new structures, fences, utilities, sidewalks, paving,
curbs, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage
caused by planting operations.
1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydromulching overspray.
2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.
3. Protect landscaping and other features remaining as final work.
B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
119
soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to
adjacent properties and walkways.
3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION
A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.
B. Newly graded subgrades:
1. Loosen/scarify subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches.
2. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots,
rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off
OWNER's property.
3. Repeat cultivation in areas where equipment used for hauling and
spreading topsoil has compacted the subgrade.
4. Tolerances: Top of subgrade plus or minus 1 inch.
C. Prepare subgrade and eliminate uneven areas and low spots.
1. Maintain lines, levels, profiles, and contours.
2. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.
D. Do not prepare subgrade in areas of on-site plant preservation.
E. Do not bury foreign material beneath areas to be seeded.
F. Remove any contaminated subgrade.
1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening.
a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed
within a few days.
b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.
2. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to
meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not
spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
a. Spread approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil over
loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of
subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.
b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.
G. Unchanged subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or
undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations,
prepare surface soil as follows:
1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf.
a. Do not mix into surface soil.
2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches.
a. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting
soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of
soil.
b. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to surface soil before
loosening.
3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots,
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
120
trash, and other extraneous matter.
4. Legally dispose of waste material, including contaminated soils,
grass, vegetation, and turf, off OWNER's property.
H. Finish grading:
1. Grade seeding areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose,
uniformly fine texture.
2. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation.
3. Roll and rake, remove ridges, fill depressions to meet finish
grades, and ensure positive surface drainage.
4. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade.
5. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.
I. Rip topsoil that has been spread to a minimum depth of 8 inches in one
direction using an agricultural ripper with tines spaced at no greater than
18 inches.
1. Areas adjacent to walks, structures, curbs, etc., where the use of
large mechanical equipment is difficult, shall be worked with smaller
equipment or by hand.
J. Manually spread topsoil close to plant materials and structures to prevent
damage.
K. Spread amendments, as determined by the soil test results or indicated on
the Drawings, over the entire area to be seeded and incorporate into the top
6 inches of soil by disking or rototilling until a uniform mixture is obtained with
no pockets of soil or amendments remaining.
L. Restore fine grade with float drag to remove irregularities resulting from
tilling operations.
1. Float drag or rake in 2 directions.
2. Remove any additional stones over 1 inch that have come to the surface.
3. Perform drainage test by applying water with the irrigation system.
4. Do not plant until the finished grade is reviewed by the ENGINEER.
5. This review does not reduce CONTRACTOR's responsibility to
provide a finished product that drains.
M. Apply fertilizer, if necessary, after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to
planting of seed.
1. Apply fertilizer at a rate as determined by the soil tests or indicated
on the Drawings.
2. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be
used to apply seed.
3. Mix thoroughly into upper 6 to 8 inches of soil.
N. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.
O. Remove any additional stones over 1 inch that have come to the surface.
P. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
121
1. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting.
2. Do not create muddy soil.
Q. Before planting, obtain ENGINEER’s acceptance of finish grading; restore
planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
R. Tolerances: Top of topsoil plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3.4 PREPARATION FOR EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS
A. Prepare area as specified in “Turf Area Preparation” Article.
B. Install per manufacturers recommendations.
C. For erosion-control blanket or mesh, install from top of slope, working
downward, and as recommended by material manufacturer for site
conditions.
1. Fasten as recommended by material manufacturer.
D. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry.
1. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting.
2. Do not create muddy soil.
3.5 SEEDING
A. Preparation for seeding:
1. Prior to seeding, if weeds exists, apply Round-Up herbicide per
manufacturer's specifications after germination of weed seeds and at
least 2 weeks prior to seeding.
2. Do not spray on a day when wind is detectable.
3. Remove remaining vegetative matter.
4. Repeat herbicide application until no weeds are evident for 14 days
after last herbicide application, as determined by the ENGINEER.
B. Drill seeding:
1. Drill seed by means of a Brillion mechanical power-drawn drill
seeders, or equal, to a maximum depth of 1/4-inch followed by
packer wheels or drag chains to provide smooth finish.
2. Seed at the rates given below.
3. Seed in 2 passes at right angles to one another.
4. Sow half the seed in each pass.
5. Provide markers or other means to assure that the successive seeded
strips will overlap or be separated by a space no greater than the space
between the rows planted by the equipment being used.
6. Do not seed during windy weather.
7. Restore fine grade after seeding as requested by the ENGINEER.
8. Remove irregularities by hand raking or rolling.
C. In areas inaccessible to a drill seeder, broadcast seed by hand in 2
opposite directions.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
122
1. Rake in seed after broadcasting.
2. Do not broadcast seed during windy weather.
D. Seeding rates:
1. Seeding rates shall be as indicated on the Drawings for drill-seeded
areas.
2. Hand and broadcast seeded areas shall receive 2 times the
seeding rate indicated.
E. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day.
F. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, frozen, or
during windy periods.
G. Roll seeded area with roller not exceeding 100 pounds.
H. Immediately following seeding and compacting, apply mulch.
I. Sow seed with spreader or seed drill machine.
1. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 miles per
hour.
2. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in 2 directions at right
angles to each other.
a. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.
b. Do not seed against existing trees.
1) Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.
J. Sow seed at a total rate as indicated on the Drawings.
K. For any Broadcast seeded areas rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of
soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
L. Protect seeded areas with erosion-control mats where indicated on the
Drawings; install and anchor according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.6 SEED ESTABLISHMENT ON SLOPES
A. Protect seeded areas with slopes and swales exceeding 1:4 with erosion-
control blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Roll fabric onto slopes without stretching or pulling.
C. Lay fabric smoothly on surface in direction of water flow.
1. Bury top end of each section in 6-inch deep excavated topsoil trench.
2. Provide 6-inch overlap of adjacent rolls.
3. Backfill trench and rake smooth, level with adjacent soil.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
123
D. Secure outside edges and overlaps at 24-inch intervals with stakes.
E. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and
soil.
F. For sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow.
1. Lap ends and edges minimum 6 inches.
3.7 MULCHING
A. Straw mulching:
1. After seeding, apply 2 tons of small-grained straw per acre.
a. Spread straw to give a 1/2-inch to 1-inch thick layer of mulch (3 to
5 straws thick) and crimp in 2 to 3 inches with a mechanical
crimper or other approved equipment.
2. Hand crimping shall be employed in areas inaccessible to crimper, or
where excessive slopes would cause unsatisfactory results.
3. Crimping against the contour shall not be accepted.
4. Apply water and tackifier with a fine spray immediately after each
area has been mulched.
a. Saturate to 4 inches of soil.
B. Hydromulching:
1. Hydromulch all dormant seeded areas with a slurry mix containing
additional tackifier.
2. Utilize hydraulic equipment with nozzle adapted for hydraulic
mulching with storage tanks having means of estimating volume
used or remaining in the tank.
3. Hydromulch shall consist of tackifier applied at a rate of 100 pounds per
acre and a cellulose fiber mulch mixed to form a homogeneous slurry;
spray applied to seeded area at a rate of 2,200 pounds per acre.
a. Hydromulch applied to dormant seeded areas shall consist of
tackifier applied at a rate of 150 pounds per acre and a cellulose
fiber mulch mixed to form a homogeneous slurry; spray applied to
seeded area at a rate of 2,200 pounds per acre.
C. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:4 by spreading straw
mulch.
1. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons per acre to form a
continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches in loose thickness over seeded
areas.
2. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.
a. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable
mechanical equipment.
b. Bond straw mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at a rate
of 10 to 13 gallons per 1,000 square feet.
1) Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
124
or other plantings adjacent to mulched areas.
2) Immediately clean damaged or stained areas.
D. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by
applying hydro mulch and tackifier within 24 hours after completing
seeding operations.
1. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch and roll
surface smooth.
3.8 EXISTING VEGETATION RENOVATION
A. Renovate existing vegetation.
B. Renovate existing vegetation damaged by CONTRACTOR's operations,
such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles.
1. Reestablish vegetation where settlement or washouts occur or where
minor regrading is required.
2. Install topsoil as required.
C. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory vegetation
areas; do not bury in soil.
D. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials such as oil drippings, fuel spills,
stones, gravel, and other construction materials resulting from
CONTRACTOR's operations, and replace with new planting soil.
E. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing vegetation.
F. Prior to seeding, irrigate for a minimum of 2 weeks to allow germination
of weed seeds.
1. Apply Round-Up herbicide per manufacturer's specifications after
germination of weed seeds and at least 2 weeks prior to seeding.
2. Do not spray on a day when wind is detectable.
3. Remove remaining vegetative matter.
4. Repeat irrigation and herbicide application until no weeds are
evident for 14 days after last herbicide application, as determined
by the ENGINEER.
G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass,
vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off OWNER's property.
H. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches.
I. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new
turf and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil.
1. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades.
J. Apply seed and protect with hydro mulch as required for new vegetation.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
125
K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established.
3.9 SATISFACTORY SEED AREAS
A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by the
ENGINEER:
1. Acceptance for soil preparation (topsoil installation] and final grading
shall be given by the ENGINEER upon satisfactory completion of each
section or area prior to seeding as indicated on the Drawings or as
otherwise specified.
2. Final completion for seeded areas shall be given by the ENGINEER
as soon as there is an even stand of grass with germination over 100
percent of the site.
a. Warranty:
1) Guarantee all seeding to be alive and healthy for 2 years
following date of final completion by the ENGINEER.
2) Seeded areas shall have an even stand of grass with
germination, over 100 percent of the site within 45 days of
seeding.
3) All seeded grass areas are to be assured of obtaining a
satisfactory stand of growth.
4) The total area occupied by bare spots larger than 0.25
square feet must not exceed 10 percent of the total seeded
area.
5) Maximum single bare spot size of irrigated seed 3
inches by 3 inches.
6) Maximum single bare spot size of non-irrigated seed is 1 square
foot.
7) All seeded grass areas which do not meet the satisfactory
stand of growth qualification shall be reseeded and mulched.
b. Re-seed areas that in the opinion of the ENGINEER do not
meet the preceding standards.
B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with
requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.
3.10 SEEDED AREA MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain and establish seeded area by watering, noxious weed
management, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other
operations as required to establish a healthy, viable seeded area.
1. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch.
2. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the
original installation.
a. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of
settling or other processes.
1) Replace materials and seeded area damaged or lost in
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
126
areas of subsidence.
b. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or
maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as
required to prevent displacement.
c. Apply treatments as required to keep seeded area and soil free of
pests and pathogens or disease.
1) Use integrated pest management practices whenever
possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce
hazards.
B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and seeded area
watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep meadow
uniformly moist.
1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and
displacement of seed or mulch.
a. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy
or newly planted areas.
2. Water meadow with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1/2 inch per week
or more for seed establishment for 6 weeks after planting or until seed
establishment is determined by the ENGINEER (whichever is longer)
unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.
3.11 PESTICIDE APPLICATION
A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents
in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Coordinate applications with OWNER's operations and others in
proximity to the Work.
2. Notify OWNER before each application is performed.
B. Post-emergent herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as
necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.12 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas.
1. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto
roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to
protect newly seeded areas from traffic.
1. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial seed establishment.
C. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment
period.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
127
D. During landscape installation:
1. All areas shall be reasonably clean at the end of each workday.
2. Sidewalks and other paved areas shall be swept or washed down as
needed.
E. Project completion:
1. All debris, soil, and trash resulting from landscape operations
shall be removed from the site.
2. All paved areas shall be washed down.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
128
SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Plastic and metal signs.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Shop Drawings: Include lists of sign types, sizes, text, and colors; mounting
details; locations; and cast metal plaque rubbings and templates.
C. Samples: Include actual materials.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of proposed products for
minimum five years with satisfactory performance record of minimum five
years.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer approved installer of products
similar to specified products on minimum 10 projects of similar scope
as Project with satisfactory performance record.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Provide signage in accordance with Americans
with Disabilities Act as published in the Federal Register, Volume 56, No.
144, Friday, July 26, 1991.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC SIGNAGE SYSTEM
A. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1. Andco Industries Corp., Greensboro, NC; equivalent product.
2. Best Manufacturing Sign Systems, Montrose, CO; equivalent product.
3. Vomar Products, Inc., Sepulveda, CA; equivalent product.
B. Frames: 3/8 inch deep with 1/8 inch wall thickness, matt finish, 6 inches
square, unless otherwise scheduled, with 1/8 inch thick backplate where
mounted on glass.
C. Inserts: Attached to frame with magnetic fastening tape, flush with
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
129
frame face, 1/16 inch reveal between insert and frame at edges.
D. Lettering: Helvetica Medium, 3/4 inches high, text as scheduled in Schedule
below.
E. Backplate: Minimum 1/8-inch thick, same face size as frame.Colors: As
selected by ENGINEER from manufacturer's standard colors.
F. Location, Text, Pictogram: As scheduled in Schedule A.
2.2 METAL SAFETY SIGNS
A. Manufacturer: Meeting OSHA Requirements; 40-mil thick aluminum with
baked enamel finish. One of the following or equal:
1. Seton Name Plate Co., New Haven, CT, Style SW-G, Special Wording.
2. Emedco, Buffalo, New York.
B. Danger Sign Colors:
1. Background: White.
2. Heading: White lettering on red oval with white border in black
rectangular panel.
3. Message: Black lettering on white.
C. Caution Sign Colors:
1. Background: Yellow.
2. Heading: Yellow lettering on black rectangular panel.
3. Message: Black lettering on yellow.
D. Safety Instruction Signs:
1. Background: White.
2. Heading: White lettering on green rectangular panel.
3. Message: Black lettering.
E. Warning Sign Colors:
1. Background: Orange.
2. Heading: Black lettering on orange diamond in black rectangular panel.
3. Message: Black lettering on orange.
F. Notice Information Signs:
1. Background: White.
2. Heading: White lettering on blue rectangular panel.
3. Message: Black lettering.
G. Location, Text: As scheduled in Schedule B.
H. Fasteners: Round head stainless steel bolts or screws.
2.3 EXTERIOR INFORMATION SIGNS
A. Able to Withstand 100 mph Wind Load Without Damage. Manufacturers:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
130
One of the following or equal:
1. ASI Sign Systems, Inc., New York, NY, System 842, GOR-glass
opaque return.
2. Andco Industries Corp.; Greensboro, NC; equivalent product.
3. Best Mfg Sign Systems: Montrose, CO; equivalent product.
4. Vomar Products, Inc.; Sepulveda, CA; equivalent product.
B. Sign Panel: Nominal 3 inches thick, consisting of 1/8-inch thick fiberglass
material with integral returns fully encapsulating wood and foam core, 1/8-
inch radius edges and corners, size as indicated on the Drawings.Text:
Helvetica Medium, size as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Posts: Nominal 3 inch square extruded aluminum sections with aluminum
fillers at top and bottom, mounting hardware, and aluminum base plates
drilled for anchor bolts.
D. Fasteners: Manufacturer is standard, suitable for application.
E. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.4 CAST METAL PLAQUE
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Andco Industries Corp., Greensboro, NC.
2. South well Co., San Antonio, TX.
3. ARK-RAMOS Inc., Oklahoma City, OK.
B. Material: Cast bronze.
C. Size: Approximately 28 by 34 inches by minimum 3/16 inches thick; lettering,
center panel, and trim raised 1/8 inch.
D. Lettering: Text as directed by ENGINEER.
E. Finishes:
1. Lettering, Center Panel, and Trim: Fine satin.
2. Background: Finely pebbled, oxidized to dull black color.
F. Mounting: Concealed with fasteners.
2.5 NON-ELECTRICAL NAMEPLATES
A. Material and Fabrication: Stainless steel sheet, engraved or stamped
with text, holes drilled or punched for fasteners.
B. Fasteners: Number 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins.
C. Text: Manufacturer's name, equipment model number and serial number,
identification tag number, and when appropriate, drive speed, motor
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
131
horsepower and rated capacity, pump rated total dynamic head and
impeller size.
2.6 ELECTRICAL NAMEPLATES
A. Material and Fabrication: Black lamicoid with white letters, holes
drilled for fasteners.
B. Fasteners: Number 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins.
C. Text: Purpose and identification of load power source and circuit number
for each disconnect means of service, feeder, branch, or equipment
conductors and push- button station.
2.7 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
1. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:Seton Name Plate Co., New
Haven, CT.
2. 3M Company.
3. Reef Industries.
B. Underground Warning Tapes: Metallic detection tape; minimum 4 mil thick by
6 inch wide polyethylene film with wording, caution, and name of service
followed by words, line buried below, repeated continuously along tape
length, and alternate metallic and color strips, blue for water, orange for
telephone, red for electric, green for sewer, yellow for gas and other
services.
C. Voltage Appliques: Seton-Code, vinyl with pressure sensitive adhesive,
orange color, 9 by 2-1/4 inches, approximately 1-1/4 inch high letters
indicating voltage and word, volts.
D. Hazard Material Signals: In accordance with NFPA Coding System and
NFC Standard 79-3; vinyl panels, letters, and symbols with pressure
sensitive adhesive, sizes as required for viewing distances, letters and
symbols in accordance with Schedule C.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces which may be damaged by installation of signs.
B. Prepare substrates in accordance with sign manufacturer's instructions.
C. Remove scale, dirt, grease, and other contaminates from substrates.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
132
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install signs in accordance with sign manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fasten signs securely in level, plumb, and true to plane positions.
C. Install metal traffic signs where indicated on the Drawings.
D. Lay underground warning tape approximately 6 inches below finish grade
above service lines.
E. Apply voltage appliques on exposed medium voltage circuit raceways at
maximum 50 foot on center.
3.3 SCHEDULES
A. Plastic Signage System Schedule.
B. Metal Safety Sign Schedule.
C. Identification Device Schedule.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
133
SCHEDULE B
METAL SAFETY SIGN
SCHEDULE
A. NONPOTABLE WATER:
1. Location: At impure water and nonpotable water hose valves in accordance
with Typical Detail M276.
2. Height: In accordance with Typical Detail.
3. Size: In accordance with Typical Detail.
4. Heading: DANGER
5. Wording: DO NOT DRINK THIS WATER
B. REMOTELY CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT:
1. Location: On front and back of equipment that starts automatically by remote
control.
2. Height: Center of sign at equipment centerline of 4’-0”..
3. Size: 7 inches high by 10 inches wide.
4. Heading: DANGER
5. Wording: THIS EQUIPMENT STARTS AUTOMATICALLY
BY REMOTE CONTROL
C. HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING:
1. Location: On front and back of equipment, adjacent to doors to rooms
containing devices, and devices that operate at 600 volts or
greater.
2. Height: 60 inches above floor to center of sign..
3. Size: 7 inches high by 10 inches wide.
4. Heading: DANGER
5. Wording: HIGH VOLTAGE
KEEP OUT
END OF SCHEDULE B - METAL SAFETY SIGN SCHEDULE
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
134
SCHEDULE C
IDENTIFICATION DEVICE SCHEDULE
A. EQUIPMENT DEVICE IDENTIFICATION:
1. Location: Sign to go on each piece of equipment or on equipment
electrical pushbutton station or on wall next to equipment,
as decided by the ENGINEER. Check with ENGINEER for
specific locations and equipment.
2. Size: 4 inches by 24 inches, or smaller, to accommodate
equipment name.
3. Material: Plastic with UV Inhibitors.
4. Color: White letters on black.
5. Attachment: Adhesive.
END OF SCHEDULE C - IDENTIFICATION DEVICE
SCHEDULE END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
135
SECTION 13121 STEEL-REINFORCED CONCRETE PREFABRICATED
BUILDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes engineering and structural design information or
parameters, off-site fabrication, delivery, and on-site erection of all
precast concrete structures and other related precast concrete elements
that are included in the building manufacturer’s scope of work. This
section includes Detailed Specifications for site specific designs and the
associated manufacturing drawings, sections, approvals, certificates
and configurations as required by client and/or code compliance.
B. Pre-fabricated precast concrete structure includes the following:
1. Exterior walls
2. Interior walls
3. Roof Slab
4. Floor Slab
5. Interior finishes
6. Mechanical and electrical components
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 16111 for Raceways , Boxes and Fittings
2. Section 16123 for Wires and Cables.
3. Section 16470 for Low Voltage Panel Boards.
4. Section 16671 for Surge Protective Devices.
5. Structural Plans.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
136
Structural Performance: Provide prefabricated concrete structure capable of
withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions
indicated:
A. Risk Category III
B. Floor Live Loads: 150 psf
C. Roof Live Load: 40 psf
D. Basic Wind Speed (3-sec Gust) (Vult): 115 mph
E. Wind Exposure Category: C
F. Wind Topographic Category 4
G. Ground Snow Load: 0 psf
H. Roof Snow Load: 0 psf
I. Seismic Design Cat: D
J. Seismic Importance Factor: 1.25
K. Soil Site Class: C
L. Seismic Design Accelerations per USGS Hazard Map
M. Design framing system and connections to maintain clearances at
openings, to allow for fabrication and construction tolerances, to
accommodate live load deflection, shrinkage and creep of primary
building structure, and other building movements. Member deflections
shall meet the limits of ACI 318 and PCI MNL-116.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 117, Standard Specifications for Concrete Construction and
Materials.
2. ACI 301, Structural Concrete for Buildings
3. ACI 304, Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.
4. ACI 309, Consolidation of Concrete.
5. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
B. American Society Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A36, Carbon Structural Steel
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
137
2. ASTM A82, Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement
3. ASTM A108, Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard
Quality
4. ASTM A153, Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
5. ASTM A185, Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete
Reinforcement
6. ASTM A497, Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete
Reinforcement
7. ASTM A615, Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
8. ASTM C33, Concrete Aggregates
9. ASTM C150, Portland Cement
10. ASTM C494, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
11. ASTM C618, Coal Fly Ash for Use as a Mineral Admixture in
Concrete
C. American Welding Society (AWS)
1. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code – Steel
2. AWS D1.4, Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel
D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): CRSI Manual of Standard
Practice
E. Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI)
1. PCI MNL-116, Manual of Quality Control for Plants and
Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products
2. PCI MNL-120, Design Handbook: Precast and Prestressed
Concrete
3. PCI MNL-123, Manual of Design Connections for
Precast/Prestressed Concrete
4. PCI MNL-124, PCI Design for Fire Resistance of
Precast/Prestressed Concrete
5. PCI MNL-127, Recommended Practice for Erection of Precast
Concrete
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturers catalog cut-sheets, published
specifications, and material description for each sub-component that is
incorporated in the pre-fabricated precast concrete structure, and other
if requested by Client\Owner\Architect.
B. Shop Drawings:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
138
1. Fabrication drawings and attachment of the various components,
including reinforcement detailing, bending, and placing concrete
reinforcement in compliance with ACI 318 and CRSI Manual of
Standard Practice.
2. Elevations, sections, and dimensions for all precast concrete
units including anchors, inserts, and embedded cast-in place
items.
3. Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing layouts indicating location of
all respective equipment, and routing of conduits and plumbing
lines.
4. Drawings and structural calculations shall be signed and sealed
by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of the project,
who is experienced in the design of the precast concrete
equipment shelters.
C. Qualification Data:
A firm that complies with the following requirements and is experienced in producing
precast concrete units similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
1. Assumes responsibility for engineering structural precast
concrete units to comply with performance requirements. The
responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer.
2. Has sufficient production capacity to produce required units
without delaying the Work.
3. Is registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Plant of manufacturer shall be certified by the
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI).
5. Must have a minimum of ten (10) years documented experience
in the design and production of precast concrete building
components.
6. Must have a minimum of ten (10) completed projects of equal size
and magnitude of this project.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
1. The fabricator shall employ a full time quality assurance person
or persons to perform material evaluation tests and to design
concrete mixes.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
139
A. General: Precast Concrete Structure Manufacturer shall perform work in
compliance with applicable requirements of ACI 318, and PCI MNL-116,
PCI MNL-120, PCI MNL-123, PCI MNL-124, and PCI MNL-127.
B. Provide Owner and Architect access to manufacturing facility for
inspections.
C. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and the design
recommendations of PCI MNL 120, “PCI Design Handbook – Precast
and Prestressed Concrete,” applicable to types of structural precast
concrete units indicated.
D. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing
requirements and quality control recommendations for types of units
required, comply with PCI MNL 116, “Manual for Quality Control for
Plants and Production of Structural Concrete Products.”
E. Comply with camber and dimensional tolerances of ACI 318 and PCI
MNL 135, “Tolerance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete
Construction.
F. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles and dimensional
requirements of precast concrete units and are based on the specific
types of units indicated. Other fabricators’ precast concrete units
complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1
Section “Substitutions.”
G. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS
D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code – Steel”; and AWS D1.4,
“Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel.”
H. Fire Resistance: Where indicated, provide structural precast concrete
units whose fire resistance meets the prescriptive requirements of the
governing code or has been calculated according to ACI 216.1/TMS
0216.1, “Standard Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete
and Masonry Construction Assemblies,” and is acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: pre-fabricated precast concrete structures
system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without
mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance
capability:
1. Ambient Temperature: 40º C
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
140
2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 40 percent.
3. Altitude: 434’.
4. Delivery access: Rough terrain.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for prefabricated
building. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified with concrete.
1.9 WARRANTY
1. Manufacturer general warranty: 1-Year.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fibrebond Corporation or Owner approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. FORM MATERIALS:
1. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Metal or other acceptable
panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth,
exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to
minimize number of joints.
2. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Metal or another
acceptable material.
3. Form Release Agent: Provide Fister – Q2 form release agent with
a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that
will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and
will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
B. REINFORCING MATERIALS
1. Rebar: ASTM A615 Gr. 60 and/or ASTM A706 (for welding
applications only).
2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A497.
C. STRUCTURAL MATERIALS
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
141
1. Structural Beam/Channels: ASTM A992.
2. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500 Gr. B.
3. Angles/Flats: ASTM A36.
D. CONCRETE MATERIALS
1. Portland cement: TXI: ASTM C 150, Type 1.
i. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless
otherwise acceptable to Architect.
2. Fine aggregate in accordance with ASTM C 33. Provide
aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete.
3. Aggregates: Light-weight aggregate in accordance with ASTM C
330. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed
concrete.
4. Water: Potable.
5. Admixtures, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain
not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.
6. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F & G.
i. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide one of the following:
1) Basis of Design: Pro-Mix, Propel Excell 25.
2) Additional Manufacturers: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
a. Pro-Mix Co.
b. Euclid Chemical Co.
c. Grace & Co.
d. Sika Corp.
ii. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,
Type
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
142
1) Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide one of the following:
a) Basis of Design: Pro-Mix Turbo Cast
b) Additional Manufacturers: Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the following:
i. Pro-Mix
ii. Euclid Chemical Co.
iii. W.R. Grace & Co.
iv. Sika Corp.
E. RELATED MATERIALS
1. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type
membrane-forming curing compound complying with ASTM C
309, Type 1, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq.
meter when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide one of the following (or approved equivalent):
1) Confilm, Pro-Mix Co.
2) Eucocure, Euclid Chemical Co.
3) Masterkure, Master Builders, Inc.
4) CS-309, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
5) Kure-N-Seal, Sonneborn-Chemrex.
6) Stontop CS2, Stonhard, Inc.
2. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component gel epoxy
suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type,
grade, and class to suit Project requirements.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide one of the following (or approved equivalent):
1) Basis of Design: Sika Hi-Mod 31.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
143
2) Additional Manufacturers: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
a) The Burke Co.
b) Euclid Chemical Co.
c) L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
d) Master Builders, Inc.
b. Roof Joint Epoxy: ASTM C 881, two-component gel epoxy
suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces.
1) Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide one of the following (or approved
equivalent)
2) Basis of Design: Prairie Epoxy 7095
F. PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES
1. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by
either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as
specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an
independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing
and reporting proposed mix designs.
2. Proportion of concrete mixes: Expanded Clay Shale light weight
concrete.
a. Designed Unit Weight: 115 (+/- 2) pounds per cubic foot.
b. Concrete strip strength: 2,750 psi at 24 hours.
c. Concrete compressive strength: 5,000 psi at 28 days.
3. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete
slump at point of placement as follows:
a. The target slump limit shall be 7 (+/- 2) inches.
b. The slump shall be monitored by full time quality
assurance plant personnel.
4. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be
requested by fabricator when characteristics of materials, job
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
144
conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant,
as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix
design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted
by Architect before using in Work.
G. ADMIXTURES
1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing
admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for
placement and workability or when pumping concrete.
2. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient
temperatures below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C).
3. Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or
retarding in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions.
H. CONCRETE MIXING
1. Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94. Concrete
must be produced/batched at the manufacturing facility location.
Transit mixed concrete will not be accepted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SHIPPING
A. Costs shall be included to deliver on site
B. Crane cost for offloading shall be included.
C. Crane representative will need to visit site prior to shipping to accept the
condition of the access road
D. Crane representative to coordinate with city to move the fence at the site
entrance.
3.2 FIELD SETUP
A. Field setup by a prefabricated building technician shall include the following:
1. One trip to site
2. Remove lifting brackets
3. Install tie downs
4. Install door canopies and/or drip strips
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
145
5. Install exterior lights and check photocells
6. Install rain hoods and/or other exterior accessories
7. Check operation of doors and door hardware
8. Adjust weather stripping on doors as needed
9. Install intruder alarms
10. Inspect roof
11. Inspect interior finish for imperfections and repair as needed
3.3 ENGINEERED DRAWINGS & STATE APPROVALS
A. Three (3) sets of stamped drawings shall be included in the price.
Additional stamped drawings will be provided for a cost of $100.00 per
set.
B. Building manufacturer fully complies with the modular construction
approval requirements in the State of California and the cost of this
approval is included in our proposal.
PART 4 - LIST OF STANDARD COMPONENTS/EQUIPMENT/FINISHES
4.1 GENERAL
A. This section of the specification provides a list of standard components,
equipment and finishes for pre-fabricated precast concrete structures.
The list is generic and may not contain all
components/equipment/finishes to address all location, design, or
specific customer requirements.
4.2 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
A. Construction Type: Steel-Reinforced Concrete
B. Outside Dimension: 11’-6" W x 20'-0" L x 10'-0.5" H
C. Inside Dimension: 9'-10" W x 18'-4" L x 8'-6.7" H
D. Weight: 57,900 lbs.
E. Wall R Value: R-24
F. Roof R Value: R-30
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
146
G. Floor R Value: R-4
H. Fire Rating: 2-hour
I. Ballistic Rating: UL 752, Level 8
4.3 EXTERIOR
A. Form liner exterior finish
B. Trim painted to match
C. Peaked roof with overhang
D. 3-ply ALDO roofing system over concrete deck
E. Exterior penetrations as required
4.4 INTERIOR
A. Interior trim package
B. Floor: 12" x 12" x 1/8" vinyl tile over concrete
C. Walls and ceiling covered with insulation, sheetrock and 3/4” FRP
4.5 MECHANICAL
A. 3'6" x 7'0" 16 gauge steel door with supercore and cast-in steel frame
B. Door painted to march exterior trim.
C. Non-removable pinned ball bearing hinges.
D. Best Mortise LH lever lock
E. Door pull handles.
F. Heavy gauge steel finish lockguard.
G. Door closer.
H. Door holder.
I. Magnetic weather stripping.
J. Drip strip over door.
K. Door stop.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
147
L. Door sweep.
M. Door threshold.
N. Door strikeplate.
O. Door canopy.
P. Cable Entrance – 8 hole 4" waveguide entry port with PVC caps.
Q. 64 ft. of 24" cable tray, layouts as per the plans.
R. 4” PVC telco entry
4.6 ELECTRICAL
A. 200 amp, 120/240VAC single phase, Cutler-Hammer 42 circuit load
center with main breaker and required circuit breakers (All circuits filled
with 20A single pole circuit breakers, except for circuit breakers as
needed for the HVAC units) or equal.
B. 160kA, single phase, Transtector Type 2 surge arrestor, 1101-808-MM-
1 (Includes prewiring and installation) or equal.
C. 20kA SAD/160kA MOV, single phase, Transtector Type 1 surge
arrestor, 1101-808-1, (Includes prewiring and installation) or equal..
D. Halo ground with perimeter ring, corner drops and equipment ground or
equal.
E. Ground bar, ¼” x 4” x 20” (Located near cable entrance, inside building)
F. Tinned ground bar, ¼” x 4” x 20” (Located near cable entrance, outside
building)
G. Eight (8) fluorescent 2-bulb, 32 watt interior T-8 light fixtures with lenses
and switches
H. One (1) 20 amp, exterior GFCI type duplex receptacle with weather
proof cover and mounting.
I. Four (4) LED 50 watt exterior flood lamp fixtures, KAXW LED-P1-4K-
R3-MVOLT with timer and bypass switch installed outside of the building
(weather proof), fed from single pole 120VAC 20A circuit in load center.
Provide complete wiring and mounting, or equal.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
148
J. Eight (8) 20 amp, interior duplex receptacles (2 installed on each side
wall of the building inside). Fed from single pole 120VAC 20A circuit in
load center.
K. Twenty (20) 20 amp, interior cable tray mounted quadplex receptacles
fed from two (2) single pole 120VAC 20A circuit in load center.
L. One (1) 20 amp, exterior GFCI type duplex receptacle
M. Conduit, wire, junction boxes and sealtite as required
4.7 HVAC
A. Two (2) 3-ton, Bard, single phase, wall mounted commercial grade air
conditioners with 5 kW heat strips and R-410A "green" refrigerant, or
equal.
B. Supply and return air grills
C. Low ambient kit
D. Anti-cycle relay
E. Bard lead lag controller, #MC4002
4.8 ALARMS
A. 50 PR alarm termination block with cover, Seimons #S66M1-50, or
equal.
B. Magnetic intrusion alarm
C. High temperature alarm
D. Low temperature alarm
E. Power fail, single phase
F. Photoelectric smoke detector, 120V
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
149
SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
Materials, installation, testing, start-up and training of the electrical system complete with
Generator, Transfer Switch, and all equipment specified
and shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. Related Work:
1. Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures
1.2 REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS
A. Regulatory Agencies: Installation, materials, equipment and workmanship
shall conform to the latest provisions of the following agencies:
1. National Fire Protection Association Standard 70 - National
Electrical Code.
2. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
3. Uniform Building Code (UBC).
4. Local authorities having lawful jurisdiction pertaining to the work
required.
5. California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24, Part 3, California
Electrical Code.
B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Materials, appliances, equipment
and devices shall conform to the applicable UL standards.
C. Standards: Where referenced in these Specifications or on the Drawings,
the publications and standards of the following organizations apply:
1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
150
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
6. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA).
7. International Electrical Testing Association, Inc. – Acceptance
Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment
and Systems (NETA ATS).
1.3 UTILITY COMPANY COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall coordinate and perform all work required for service
by Pacific Gas & Electric Company (PG&E). Application for service
paperwork has been initiated by City. Make any service and installation
agreements that the utility company may require.
B. Furnish and install electric service entrance equipment in accordance with
the serving utility's requirements. Coordinate with the serving utility to
ensure timely connection by the utility. Obtain utility company approval of
service entrance and metering equipment shop drawings prior to starting
fabrication.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate submittals with the work so that the
project will not be delayed. No extension of time will be allowed because
of failure to properly schedule submittals.
B. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal
Procedures.
C. Submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section
01700.
D. Submit shop drawings for all equipment and materials within 30 days after
contract drawings approved.
E. Submit shop drawings by Specification section, unless listed otherwise.
Separate sub-sections by either tab dividers or separately bound booklets.
Each section submittal shall be complete, with shop drawings provided for
all components. Partial shop drawings for specification sections shall be
rejected.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
151
F. Shop drawings returned to the contractor with a "Revise as Noted and
Resubmit" status shall be resubmitted within fifteen (15) days.
G. Submit shop drawings for review at least 20 days before reviewed
drawings will be required for commencing the work.
H. The following submittals should be assembled and delivered in separate
binders:
1. Utility Structures
2. Meter Panel
3. Generator
4. Transfer Switch
5. Fiberbond Prefab Building
6. Sabre Towers Radio Tower
7. Conduits, Pull Boxes, Hand holes, Cable and Wiring Devices
8. Electrical Miscellaneous Components – cable tray, ground
equipment, lights, etc.
I. Each submittal shall be bound in a three ring binder, which is sized such
that when all material is inserted, the binder is not over 3/4 full. Binder
construction shall allow easy removal of any page without complete
manual disassembly. Spiral ring type binders are not acceptable.
1. Each binder shall be appropriately labeled on the outside spine and
front cover with the project name, contract number, equipment
supplier's name, specification section(s), and major material
contained therein.
2. An index shall be provided at the inside of the front cover. This
index shall itemize the contents of each tab and sub tab section.
Also list the project name, contract number and equipments
supplier's name, address and phone number on the index page.
3. Field equipment shop documents, panel equipment shop
documents, drawings, and bill of materials shall be grouped under
separate tabs. Shop documents shall be ordered in the same
sequence as their corresponding Contract specification subsection.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
152
Failure to mark applicable products and to cross out non-applicable
products shall cause rejection of the entire submittal.
4. Data summary sheets shall be provided to sub tab all shop
documents for each individual piece of equipment. Data summary
sheets shall be on blue paper. The data summary sheets shall have
the following information:
a. Product identification; name used herein and on the Contract
Drawings.
b. The manufacturer's model number, part number or other
designation. This shall include the specific numbers of all
options.
c. Tag number per the Drawings.
J. Do not commence any work until the required submittals are approved by
Engineer according to Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The manuals shall describe
the equipment and meet all the requirements in the other technical
sections and include the following:
1. Operating instructions and start-up procedures including receiving
and installation requirements.
2. Maintenance instructions listing preventive and corrective
maintenance procedures. Corrective maintenance procedures shall
identify the most probable failures and the appropriate repairs. Test
measurement levels shall be referenced to specific test points on
the installed equipment.
3. Spare parts data shall be furnished for each item of material and
equipment specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts
and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply. A list
and itemized price breakdown of spare parts recommended for
stocking shall be furnished. The parts selected shall be those, in
the manufacturer's judgment, will be involved in the majority of
maintenance difficulties encountered.
4. A table listing the tag number, manufacturer and manufacturer's
model number shall be provided to summarize the Bill of Material.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
153
5. Control schematics, ladder diagrams and interconnection drawings.
6. Catalog cuts and technical manuals for all components of the
system.
7. Originals of all guarantees and warranties issued for the
various items of equipment, showing all dates of expiration.
8. Originals of all factory and field test results.
9. Final as-builts of all shop drawings, incorporating manufacturing
and field changes. All drawings will be by 11x17 inch sheet size
and also electronic format, AutoCAD on CD.
10. For items referenced under AutoCAD Record Drawings included in
this Specification, provide a CD with files as required in "AutoCAD
Record Drawings."
11. All catalog cut information, warranties, testing results and technical
manuals shall be provided on CD in PDF format, in addition to
hardcopy.
12. Operation and maintenance manuals to be delivered and approved
prior to final approval and project completion.
1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. During progress of job, keep up-to-date one set of electrical drawings
stamped with "As-Built". Dimension from the following readily obtained
base lines:
1. Exact location, type and function of concealed control equipment
and devices.
2. Exact elevation and locations and size of underground conduits.
3. Show the dimensions, location and routing of electrical work which
will become concealed.
B. Maintain "As-Built" drawings weekly in conjunction with the actual
progress of installation. Accurate progress drawings shall be available on
site for examination by the City's representative.
C. At completion of the project, deliver "As-Built" drawings to the City's
representative.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
154
D. The Contractor shall guarantee the accuracy of the "As-Built" record
drawings, and the AutoCAD record drawings for a period of one year after
the City has accepted the project. During this time, the Contractor shall
bear all costs associated with correcting deficiencies and inaccuracies of
these Drawings. During this time, the Contractor shall also bear all costs
necessary to field investigate any deficiencies, or inaccuracies and field
trace wires if required by Project Engineer.
1.7 AUTOCAD RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Provide two identical copies of the record drawings CD using AutoCAD
drafting software.
B. These drawings shall include information as described. The drawings shall
reference wire numbers, wire colors, terminal block numbers and also tag
names coded for all cables, conduits, wireways and all components and
equipment. Methodology for assigning tag numbers for components and
equipment shall be based on ANSI Standard 5.1-1984.
C. The Contractor shall resubmit two identical copies of the entire AutoCAD
drawing files for each revision necessitated.
D. Provide AutoCAD record drawings for the following:
1. Electrical Record Drawings, including schematic, and interconnect
drawings with wire labels.
2. Power Distribution
3. Conduit and Cable Routing Drawings, including labels
1.8 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS NOTIFICATION
A. Provide written notification to Engineer and City one week prior to the start
of the following construction events. Acceptable delivery methods for this
notification shall include hand delivery at the weekly construction meeting,
e-mail, mail or by fax.
1. Installation of underground work. Obtain Inspector's approval prior
to backfill. The Inspector may direct uncovering of any work not so
approved.
2. Generator installation.
3. Start of wire pulling.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
155
4. Scheduled start date for field test and start-up.
1.10 ELECTRICAL SUPERVISION
A. Provide the electrician supervisor services at the job site for the man-days
and requirements listed below, travel time excluded, at no extra cost to the
City:
1. Three man-days to assist the City's Representative in the start up
and verification of system operation.
2. Additional time as required to attend construction meetings when
either:
a. Electrical submittals are being reviewed.
b. Electrical work, testing, or startup is being done.
3. Additional time as required to maintain and update the field copy of
the "As Built" drawings at least on a weekly basis when electrical
work is being done. Each weekly update to the "As-Built" drawings
shall be completed prior to the weekly construction meeting.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Similar materials and equipment shall be the product of a single
manufacturer.
B. Materials as specified in the plans or specifications shall be be provided.
Approved equal material can be used, if approved by Owner, unless it is
specified to use a material from a specific provider.
C. Provide and install equipment and materials shown on the Drawings and
as specified unless noted as "Not in Contract", "Future" or as "Existing to
Remain". Provide only products which are new, undamaged and in the
original cartons or containers.
C. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such material and shall be the
manufacturer's current design.
D. Materials and equipment shall be suitable for storage, installation and
operation in an ambient of 0C to 40C except where more stringent
conditions are stated in individual equipment specifications.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
156
E. Factory finished electrical equipment, wireways and panels with
manufacturer's standard primer and enamel topcoats, unless stated
otherwise in the individual equipment specifications. Provide 1 pint of the
equipment manufacturer's touch-up paint.
F. Concrete housekeeping pads are required for the Electric Equipment
lineup. Housekeeping pads shall be 3 inches above finished grade, 6
inches longer on sides and 3 inches in front, than the supported
equipment, unless otherwise shown on drawings.
2.2 TESTING LABORATORY APPROVALS
A. Electrical materials and equipment shall be listed, certified or found
acceptable by a recognized testing laboratory. Results of tests and
inspections by the testing laboratory shall be submitted for review and
approval to the local authorities having jurisdiction upon request. In testing
the equipment, the following shall be considered:
1. Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the provisions
of the NEC.
2. Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts designed to
enclose and protect other equipment, the adequacy of the
protection thus provided.
3. Wire bending and connection space.
4. Electrical insulation.
5. Heating effects under normal conditions of use and also under
abnormal conditions likely to arise in service.
6. Arcing effects.
7. Classification by type, size, voltage, current capacity and specific
use.
8. Other factors which contribute to the practical safeguarding of
persons using or likely to come in contact with the equipment.
B. Recognized testing laboratories are as follows:
1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
2. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL).
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
157
3. Other testing laboratories will be acceptable if approved in writing
by the local authorities having lawful jurisdiction.
D. Provide the testing laboratory label on equipment material and devices.
2.3 WARRANTY
A. Equipment materials and installation shall be guaranteed for a period of
one year after the date of final acceptance of the work by the City. Repair
or remove and replace any and all work that is found to be defective in
workmanship and/or materials within said one year periods, without
expense whatsoever to the City.
B. Respond to repairs within 48 hours after notice from the City.
C. Warranties, Guarantees, Certificates, etc: Shall be furnished for all
equipment and materials under this Division, and shall be properly filled
out as of date of acceptance and delivered to the City.
D. The City reserves the right to perform maintenance with their own staff,
consultant or service contractor, as necessary to meet City operational
requirements, without voiding warranties.
2.4 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall be fabricated from black-letter, white-face laminated
plastic phenolic engraving stock, Formica type ES-1, or equal. Each shall
be fastened securely using fasteners of stainless steel screws, screwed into
inserts or tapped holes as required, or attached by adhesive cement glue.
Engraved characters shall be block style with no characters smaller than
1/4-inch high. All electrical equipment shall have a nameplate attached.
This applies to exterior conduits, pull boxes, splice boxes, manholes,
panelboards, control panels, transformers, switches, etc. Exterior conduits
shall have phenolic tags adhesive epoxied to the interior of manholes.
Interior conduits shall have stainless steel stamped tags with stainless steel
tie wire. Every conduit shall be labeled, both ends.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Terminate wires and cables at the proper termination point per the
manufacturer's recommendations. The Drawings indicate connections for
typical equipment only. If the equipment or connections are different from
what is shown, provide the modifications necessary for a safe and
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
158
properly operating installation in accordance with the equipment
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. The Drawings diagrammatically indicate the desired location and
arrangement of outlets, conduit runs, equipment and other items. Verify
field conditions to determine exact location based on physical size and
arrangement of equipment, finished elevations and obstructions.
C. Work or equipment not indicated or specified which is necessary for the
complete and proper operation of the Electrical systems shall be
accomplished without additional cost or delays to the City.
3.2 DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLETE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Demonstration of the functionality of the systems shall not be construed as
acceptability of the complete system. Acceptance will only be made on
satisfactory demonstration of the functionality of the system as a whole,
with the City and Engineer as witnesses.
B. If, in the opinion of the Engineer or City, test results show improper
adjustment, operation, or performance of any equipment, the Contractor
shall remedy the situation at no additional cost.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
159
SECTION 16030 ELECTRICAL TESTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the work necessary to test, commission and
demonstrate that the electrical work satisfies the criteria of this
specification and functions as required by the Contract Documents.
B. The work of this section includes furnishing the labor, equipment, and
power required to support the testing of equipment specified in other
sections of the specification. Functional testing of all power and controls
shall be completed before commencement of start-up. This scope of work
may require the Contractor to activate circuits, shutdown circuits, and run
equipment, make electrical measurements, replace blown fuses, install
temporary jumpers, etc.
C. Contractor is responsible for all work, equipment damage, power
interruptions and schedule delays caused by the testing agency.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Results of all testing shall be submitted prior to final project acceptance,
per Specification 01300. Six copies are required to be included as part of
final Operations and Maintenance Manuals. Submittal shall describe test
conditions, weather including temperature and humidity, test date,
duration of test, test equipment, tested equipment, testing technician, “as
found” and “as-left” results, expected results, actual results, pass/fail
status based on listed testing standards and a registered Professional
Engineers stamp and signature; registered in Electrical Engineering in the
State of California.
Deficiencies and non-compliant test results found during acceptance
testing shall be identified in the test report and cover letter. The Testing
Firm shall certify in the final test report that all deficiencies and non-
compliant test results listed have been “corrected” and shall include a
description of the resolution for each problem listed. The Contractor shall
bear the costs of “correcting” the deficiencies and non-compliant results
including the re-testing of the system for acceptance; the City shall not be
responsible for the costs associated with any additional testing required
for the acceptance of the electrical system.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
160
B. Specific data relative to insulation resistance, voltage levels, load currents,
relay settings, dial settings, etc., shall be provided for all equipment and
material required to be tested.
C. Test result shall be submitted in one submittal
D. Test reports shall be based on NETA’s latest Acceptance Testing
Specifications having a sign-off, pass/fail data filed for each line item
covered by NETA’s Acceptance Testing Specifications latest edition.
1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Include the Electrical Test Result Study within the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals.
1.4 TESTING ORGANIZATION QUALIFICATIONS
A. Testing organization shall be corporately and financially independent of
the supplier, producer and installer of the equipment, who has been
regularly engaged in the testing of equipment for a period of at least 10
years. All testing shall be conducted under the direct supervision of an
electrical engineer, registered in the State of California. This registered
electrical engineer will prepare and sign test reports with values,
recommendations, and comments.
B. Testing equipment required to conduct the specified tests shall be
furnished by the testing organization. Testing equipment shall be in good
working condition and comply with the requirements of this Specification
and applicable industry standards.
C. Testing shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
these Specifications, and applicable NETA Acceptance Testing
Specifications, NEMA, ANSI, NFPA, and ASTM Standards. Forms shall
include space for ENGINEER sign off at time of test. Testing organization
shall meet Federal OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories,
Title 29, Part 1907, 1910 and 1936. Membership in the National Electrical
Testing Association constitutes proof of meeting such criteria.
D. The testing organization shall cooperate with any manufacturer's
representative that may be retained by the CONTRACTOR. Testing
organization shall be Cutler-Hammer; Electro-test; Power Systems;
General Electric; or equal NETA approved testing company.
1.5 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES
A. All inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the following codes
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
161
and latest standards as provided otherwise herein:
1. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association – NEMA
2. American Society for Testing and Materials – ASTM
3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers – IEEE
4. International Electrical Testing Association, Inc. – Acceptance
Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment
Systems (NETA ATS)
5. American National Standards Institute - ANSI C2: National
Electrical Safety Code
6. State and local codes and ordinances
7. Insulated Cable Engineers Association – ICEA
8. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies – AEIC
9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration – OSHA
10. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA
B. Inspections and tests shall utilize the following references:
1. Project Specifications
2. Project Drawings
3. Manufacturer's instruction manuals applicable to each particular
apparatus
1.6 SAFETY AND PRECAUTIONS
A. Safety practices shall include, but are not limited to, the following
requirements:
1. Occupational Safety and Health Act
2. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, National
Safety Council
3. Applicable state and local safety operating procedures
4. City's safety practices
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
162
5. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA 70E
6. American National Standards for Personnel Protection
B. All tests shall be performed with apparatus de-energized. Exceptions must
be thoroughly reviewed to identify safety hazards and devise adequate
safeguards.
C. The testing firm shall have a designated safety representative on the
project to supervise the testing operations with respect to safety.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Perform Electrical Tests after electrical installation is 100% completed.
1.8 LIST OF ITEMS TO BE TESTED
A. Transfer Switch
B. Panelboards
C. Cables
D. Generator
E. System Ground
F. Miscellaneous Testing
PART 2 MATERIALS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING
A. The following test requirements are intended to supplement test and
acceptance criteria that may be stated elsewhere in the specifications.
Testing of all electrical equipment shall be in accordance with ANSI/NETA
ATS-2017.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
163
B. Transfer Switch
1. Clean equipment prior to testing.
2. Inspect for nameplate compliance and physical damage.
3. Confirm correct application of manufacturer’s recommended
lubricants.
4. Verify wiring is attached, properly torqued and neatly routed. Verify
control wiring connections.
5. Perform manual transfer operation and automatic operation.
6. Verify positive mechanical interlocking between normal and
emergency sources.
7. Perform contact resistance test.
8. Perform insulation-resistance on each pole, phase to phase, and
phase to ground with switch closed and across each open pole for
one minute. Perform tests in both source positions.
9. Verify settings and operation of control devices.
10. Calibrate and reset if required all settings, relays, and timers. Verify
set points with Engineer.
11. Refer to Section 16413 – Transfer switch, for the additional testing
requirements.
C. Panelboard
1. Clean equipment prior to testing.
2. Inspect for physical damage, grounding, proper connections, and
anchorage.
3. Test insulation of the bus phase to phase and phase to ground.
Record data.
4. Test operation of each circuit breaker.
5. Verify nameplate data, panelboard schedule information.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
164
6. Check for proper torqueing of all bolted connections.
7. Verify proper grounding of lugs, conduit hubs, and panelboard.
D. Cables
1. Refer to Section 16120 - Wires and Cables, for the testing
requirements.
2. Perform a shield continuity test by ohmmeter method for
instrumentation cables. Ohmic value shall be recorded.
3. Check for proper termination of cables.
E. Generator
1. Refer to Section 16235 – Engine Generators, for the testing
requirements.
F. System Ground
1. Verify each ground system, is installed in compliance with Drawings
and Specifications.
2. Provide ground-resistance tests with a ground-resistance megger.
Use appropriate method (fall of potential, three-terminal method) to
measure ohmic value of ground system to earth (maximum 5
ohms). Verify all equipment ground terminations with respect to
prime point used to establish ohmic value stated above.
G. Miscellaneous Testing
1. Demonstrate that light fixture outlets are switched as indicated on
the Contract Drawings. Test lighting motion detector. Demonstrate
that circuitry is in accordance with panel schedules. Test Ground
Fault Interrupter (GFI) receptacles.
2. Perform overall system function tests upon completion of equipment
tests. Verify correct operation of all interlock devices, alarms,
sensing devices and indicating devices.
3.2 TESTING SEQUENCE
A. After initial settings have been completed, each system shall be operated
in the manual mode and it shall be demonstrated that operation is in
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
165
compliance with the Contract. Once the manual mode of operation has been proven,
automatic operation shall be demonstrated.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
166
SECTION 16060 GROUNDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Grounding
B. Related Work:
1. Section 16010: General Electrical Requirements
2. Section 16123: Wire and Cables
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010.
B. Submit material list and catalog cuts for all grounding materials and
equipment. Indicate size, material and manufacturer.
1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Include test results as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals in
accordance with Section 16010.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: Less than 5 ohms.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Materials shall comply with Section 16010.
2.2 GROUND RODS
A. Provide copper-clad steel, ¾-inch diameter, minimum 10 feet long, with
hardened steel points.
2.3 GROUND CONNECTORS
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
167
A. Products shall be listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the
materials used.
B. Above ground installations: Mechanical and/or compression type
connectors.
C. Below ground installations: Exothermic and/or compression type
connectors.
2.4 GROUND CONDUCTORS
A. Underground ground conductors not in conduit shall be annealed bare
standard copper conforming to ASTM B8. Size shall be #4/0 copper
minimum unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
B. Ground conductors in conduit shall comply with Section 16123 for Power
Wire and have green insulation.
2.5 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A. Weld connections together using an exothermic fusion type process.
Provide connections equal or larger in size than the conductors joined and
with the same current carrying capacity as the largest conductor.
Connections shall be Cadweld or equivalent.
2.6 GROUND WELLS
A. Ground wells shall be 10-1/2” x 17-1/2” pull boxes with steel bolt down
type cover, inscribed “GROUND”.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GROUND ELECTRODE
A. Bond the metallic piping system to the grounding system in accordance
with NEC Article 250-52 and Table 250-122. Bond all structural steel,
water pipes, rebar mats and as shown on the Drawings for a complete
ground electrode system.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated throat grounding bushings on all conduits. Ground
raceways and non-current carrying parts of electrical equipment in
accordance with NEC Article 250. Use the metallic conduit system for
equipment and enclosure grounding in addition to the grounding conductor
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
168
installed in each conduit. Grounding as part of the conduit system shall be in addition of
any ground conductors shown on the drawings. Connect each conduit grounding
bushing to the equipment ground bus with a ground conductor sized in accordance with
NEC Table 250-122.
B. Ground all gates, fences, and handrails, even if not shown on Drawings.
Grounding conductor from ground grid to gates, fences and handrails shall
be #2 AWG minimum.
3.3 FIELD TESTING
A. Before placement of sidewalks, landscape and paving, measure the
resistance of each electrode to ground using a ground resistance tester.
Perform the test not less than two days after the most recent rainfall and in
the afternoon after any ground condensation (dew) has evaporated.
Submit readings as part of System Ground Test defined in Section 16030.
B. After all individual ground electrode readings have been made,
interconnect ground grid as required and measure the system's ground
resistance at the emergency generator ground bus and at each ground
electrode.
C. Do not energize the electrical power system unless the system ground
resistance is less than 5 ohms at all points tested. For system ground
resistance greater then 5 ohms and for individual electrode ground
resistance of 5 ohms or more, install additional grounding electrodes per
NEC Article 250 and notify the Engineer.
D. Test per Section 16030.
E. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
169
SECTION 16111 RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Raceways
2. Boxes
3. Fittings
4. Supporting Devices
B. Related Work:
1. Section 16010: General Electrical Requirements
2. Section 16060: Grounding
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010.
B. Submit material list and catalog cuts for devices and materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Raceways, boxes and fittings shall comply with Section 16010.
2.2 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Material:
1. Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings: ANSI C80.1 and UL-6, hot dipped
galvanized after threading.
B. Fittings:
1. Locknuts: Steel or malleable iron.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
170
2. Bushings: Threaded, grounding type, malleable iron, with 105C
rated plastic insulated throat. Provide grounding type bushings on
all rigid steel conduits. Plastic bushings with a temperature rating
of 105C may be used for PVC conduits or conduits containing 24
VDC circuits.
3. Box Connectors for Exterior, Damp and Wet Locations: Provide
watertight threaded hubs consisting of sealing fitting with tapered
conduit thread, neoprene O-ring, and 105C rated insulating throat
with grounding and bonding lug.
4. Couplings: Threaded, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
5. Conduit Seals:
a. Drain and breather: Stainless steel.
b. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the
sealing fitting.
2.3 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (PVC) AND FITTINGS
A. Material: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), 90C rise rating, conforming to NEMA
TC-2 and UL-651.
B. Conduit, excluding elbows, risers, or bends: Schedule 40 PVC.
C. Elbows, Risers, or bends: Rigid nonmetallic conduit for elbows, risers, or
bends are not acceptable. Refer to Part 3, Conduit Usage Schedule.
D. Couplings, adapters, bell ends, expansion couplings, elbows and turns of
30degrees shall be factory made to NEMA standards TC-2 and TC-3.
E. Joint Cement: As recommended by manufacturer as suitable for the
climate, furnished with instructions to achieve watertight joints.
2.4 PVC COATED RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Material: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coated rigid steel conduit, hot-dip
galvanized inside and out with hot-dip galvanized threads, conforming to
NEMA RN-1 and UL-514B. Acceptable Manufacturers OCAL, Robroy, or
approved equal.
B. Fittings shall be PVC-coated ferrous, general service and corrosive
location, UL listed.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
171
C. Rigid Hubs, Form 8 covers, and Liquid tight fittings shall be PVC-coated
with uncoated male threads and locknut. Refer to Part 3, Conduit Usage
Schedule.
D. All female ends of PVC-coated conduit fittings shall have a flexible PVC
sleeve which extends from the female ends of the fitting and which will
overlap the PVC coating on the conduit when the fitting has been installed.
The length of the sleeve extensions shall be at least equivalent to the
nominal conduit size for sizes up through 2 inch. For sizes 2 – 6 inches, the
length of the sleeve extensions shall be at least 2 inches. The inside
diameter of the overlapping sleeve shall be less than the outside diameter
of the PVC-coated conduit.
2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit: Single strip steel, hot dipped galvanized prior to conduit
fabrication with overall PVC jacket. Conform to UL-360.
B. Fittings: Hot-dip or mechanically galvanized with insulated throat, locknut
and sealing ring.
2.6 CONDUIT BODIES
A. Provide threaded - hub cast ferrous or aluminum boxes. Provide with open
type neoprene gaskets and matching cast ferrous covers, secured with at
least two captive Type 304 stainless steel screws.
2.7 OUTLET BOXES
A. Exposed Boxes: Cast iron or aluminum, with threaded hubs and mounting
lugs.
2.8 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. General: Construct of 12-gauge steel for boxes larger than 30” wide by 30”
high, and 14 gage for smaller boxes. Provide factory made standard sizes
and shop fabricate when non-standard size boxes are shown. Comply with
UL and NEMA standards. Use where conduit bodies are not practical.
B. Interior, exposed dry locations NEMA 1 pull boxes hot-dipped galvanized
after fabrication in accordance with ASTM 123.
C. Outdoor and wet locations or where indicated as weatherproof. Where
located outdoors, in wet locations, or indicated as weatherproof and where
threaded-hub cast boxes and fittings are not practical, provide pull boxes
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
172
constructed of code-gauge steel, prime coated, and finish with two coats of rust-resistant
paint. Color shall match surrounding decor. Install cover with Type 304 stainless-steel
bolts. Provide NEMA 3R construction.
2.9 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Channel and Channel Conduit Clamps
1. Steel Channel: Steel channel 1-5/8 inches wide by 1-5/8 inches or
3-1/4 inches high by 12-guage metal thickness conforming to
ASTM A570, Grade 33. Hot-dip galvanize channels after
fabrication per ASTM A123. Provide fittings and two piece U
shaped conduit clamps formed from ASTM A570 Grade 33 Steel
and hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with
ASTM 123. Provide Unistrut P1000HG for 1-5/8 inch channel,
Unistrut P1001HG for 3-1/4 inch channels or equivalent.
2. Non-Metallic Channel: Glass-reinforced polyester or vinylester
channel 1-5/8 inches wide by 1-5/8 or 3-1/4 inches high with 100%
ultra-violet surface veil. Provide with two-piece U shaped
polyurethane conduit clamps, glass fiber reinforced polyurethane
fittings and vinylester-threaded rods. Provide Aickinstrut Inc., or
equivalent.
3. Stainless Steel Channel: Provide stainless steel channel 1-5/8
inches wide by 1-5/8 inches by 12-guage thickness, or as noted on
Drawings.
B. Anchor bolts and Screws
1. Materials
a. Indoor, Dry Locations: Anchor bolts and screws shall be
ASTM A307 galvanized steel. Nuts shall be hex, ASTM
A563 galvanized steel.
b. Outdoor, Wet or Corrosive Areas: Anchor bolts and screws
shall be Type 316 ASTM A276 stainless steel. Nuts shall be
hex Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A194, Grade SM, or
ASTM F594, Type 316 stainless steel.
2. Types
a. Concrete: epoxy adhesive anchor bolts.
C. Conduit Clamps
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
173
1. Beam Clamps: Malleable iron, electro galvanized finish.
2. Conduit Clamps: Malleable iron with hot dipped galvanized finish.
3. Clamp Backs: Malleable iron with hot dipped galvanized finish.
4. PVC Coated Clamps: Same as above except with .40 mil PVC
coating.
2.10 UNDERGROUND PULL BOXES
A. General: Provide precast concrete units complying with ASTM C858 with
a load designation of A-16. Dimensions indicated on drawings are inside
box dimensions. Units shall have a sump in the bottom. Provide units
manufactured by Oldcastle Precast, Jensen Precast or equivalent.
B. Handholes: Refer to drawings for size. Provide handholes with concrete
bolt down covers in unpaved areas and with flush mounted cast iron traffic
covers with bolt downs and lifting hook in paved areas.
C. Concrete pull boxes and vaults: Provide with pull-in iron, hot-dipped
galvanized cover with hot-dipped galvanized frame, and two galvanized
cable racks with porcelain blocks on each of the two longest sides. Provide
parkway rated covers in non-traffic areas and AASHTO H-20 traffic rated
covers in traffic areas. Refer to Drawings for size. Secure covers with two
stainless steel penthead bolts to stainless steel insert nuts. After cables
have been pulled and inspected, seal box between cover and frame with a
mastic compound similar to Permagum, Dukaseal, or equivalent.
1. For pullboxes 2 feet by 3 feet and larger provide end hinged, torsion
spring opening assist type cover assemblies. Provide single leaf
assemblies for 2 feet by 3 feet pullboxes. Provide double leaf
assemblies for pullboxes larger than 2 feet by 3 feet.
D. Boxes shall be installed on minimum 6-inch compacted crushed rock
base. Contractor shall knock-out sump in bottom of box such that water
can drain through sump to the crushed rock underneath the box.
E. Cover Identification: engrave or bead weld handhole and pullbox covers to
indicated services within pullbox as follows:
Service Identification
Power Electric
General Area Lighting Lighting
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
174
Telephone Telephone
Ground Rods Ground
F. Joint Sealing Compound: Provide joint sealing compound conforming to
Federal Specification SS-S-00210. Provide Associated Concrete Products
Quickseal or equivalent.
2.11 CONCRETE – ENCASED DUCT BANKS
A. Concrete shall conform to ASTM C94, with 2 day 2000 PSI
comprehensive strength and minimum cement content of 376 pounds per
cubic yard. Use a color additive for identification purposes: Brick red
Colorfull, as manufactured by Owl Manufacturing Company, Arcadia,
California; coral red Chrimix C-22 as manufactured by L.M. Scofield
Company, Los Angeles, California; or equivalent. Add the color additive
while the concrete is being mixed using the quantity per cubic yard of
concrete recommended by the manufacturer for the class of concrete
indicated.
2.12 CONDUIT TAGS
A. Provide 3/8 inch high by 2-inch wide stainless steel tags with 3/16-inch
machine printed or engraved lettering to all conduits, both ends. Lettering
shall identify each conduit with a unique identifier based on ANSVISA
STD. 5.1-1984.
B. Attach conduit tags to conduit with stainless steel wire.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUIT AND SUPPORT USAGE SCHEDULE
A. General: Install the following types of conduits, fittings and supports in
locations listed, unless otherwise noted in the drawings.
B. Interior Exposed
1. Material: Galvanized rigid steel.
C. Exterior Exposed
1. Material: Galvanized rigid steel.
D. Embedded in Concrete (excluding transitions through wetwell walls and
equipment pads and all elbows, which shall be PVC coated rigid steel
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
175
conduit):
1. Material: Galvanized rigid steel.
E. Underground Direct Burial, or Below Concrete Slabs:
1. Material, (Excluding elbows, risers and bends): Rigid non-metallic
PVC.
2. Bends, elbows, and risers shall be made with PVC coated rigid
steel conduit using threaded adapters.
F. Final connections to instruments (pressure switches, valve limit switches
etc.)
1. Material: Liquid-tight flexible conduit and galvanized rigid steel
fittings and supports.
2. Length: Minimum three feet conduit lengths for conduits 3 inches or
larger. Minimum two feet for remaining conduit sizes. Maximum six-
foot length.
3.2 RACEWAY FILL
A. The conductor fill for all conduits shall be based on Annex C of the NEC,
THW conductors or as shown on the Drawings, which ever is larger. The
intent of this requirement is to furnish larger conduit diameter than the
NEC Code requires for a specific cable insulation. Compute the maximum conduit fill
using NEC requirements for type THW conductors (or larger if applicable), although the
actual wiring may be with conductors having smaller cross-sections.
3.3 BENDS
A. Provide no more than three (3) 90-degree conduit bends or the equivalent
number of smaller radius bends in any conduit run between boxes or
equipment.
B. Length of Run: 300 feet maximum, less 100 feet for each equivalent 90-
degree bend.
3.4 CONDUIT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Conduit runs are shown schematically. Install concealed unless
specifically noted on Drawings. Supports, pull boxes, junction boxes, and
other ancillary equipment are not usually shown. Provide pull boxes and
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
176
junction boxes where shown.
B. Run exposed conduits parallel and perpendicular to surface or exposed
structural members and follow surface contours as much as practical to
provide a neat appearance.
C. Make bends and offsets so that the inside diameter of conduit is not
effectively reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in
the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel.
D. Cap all conduits immediately after installation to prevent entrance of
foreign matter.
E. Do not use diagonal runs except for concealed areas or when specifically
shown in the drawings.
F. Treat all threaded joints of rigid steel conduit with T&B Kopr-Shield before
installing fittings, except where conduit is run in dry locations.
G. Conduit Terminations:
1. The ends of all rigid steel conduit or PVC coated rigid steel conduit
shall be cut square, field reamed, all burrs removed and cleaned for
pulling wire.
2. Install conduits squarely to the box when terminating with locknuts
and provide one locknut outside the box and one locknut and
bushing inside the box. Install locknuts with dished side against the
box. When terminating in threaded hubs, screw the conduit or fitting
tight into the hub so that the end bears against the fire protection
shoulder.
3. When chase nipples are used, install the raceway and coupling
square to the box and tighten the chase nipple leaving no exposed
threads.
H. Do not route conduits below or within concrete footing except to cross
footing at 90-degree angles.
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Provide grounding in accordance with Section 16060.
B. Use grounding bushings for all rigid steel conduits. Bond to equipment
frame and grounded conductor.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
177
C. Provide a grounding conductor in flexible and liquid-tight flexible conduit,
size conforming to NEC Article 250 - Equipment Grounding Conductors.
3.6 CONDUITS EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE AND BELOW SLABS
A. Install conduits and sleeves passing through slabs, walls, columns or
beams so as not to impair the strength of construction. Secure conduit to
prevent sagging or shifting during concrete pour.
3.7 SUPPORTS
A. Maximum Spacing of Raceway Supports:
Raceway
Size
(Inches)
No. of
Conductors
In Run
Location
Support
Spacing
(feet)
HORIZONTAL RUNS
3/4 1 or 2 Flat ceiling or wall 5
3/4
1 or 2
Where it is difficult to provide
supports except at intervals fixed
by the building construction
7
3/4 3 or more Any location 7
1 & larger 1 or 2 Flat ceiling or wall 6
1 & larger
1 or 2
Where it is difficult to provide
supports except at intervals fixed
by the building construction
10
1 & larger 3 or more Any locations 10
Any …. Concealed 10
VERTICAL RUNS
3/4 …. Exposed 7
1, 1-1/4 …. Exposed 8
1-1/2 and larger …. Exposed 10
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
178
3.8 CONDUIT PENETRATIONS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, dry-pack with non-shrink grout around
raceways, which penetrate concrete block, masonry and concrete walls
above grade, floors, or ceilings.
B. Maintain the integrity of all damp-proofing and water proofing membranes
that are penetrated by raceways and boxes.
C. Non-shrink grout shall conform to the Corps of Engineers specification for
Non-shrink Grout, CRD-621-88 and to these Specifications. Use a non
gas-liberating type, cement base, premixed product requiring only the
addition of water for the required consistency.
3.9 DAMAGED CONDUITS
A. Replace all conduits that are damaged.
B. Replace crushed or clogged conduit or any conduit whose inner surface is
damaged or not smooth.
C. Repair cuts, nicks or abrasions in the zinc coating of galvanized conduit
with galvanizing repair stick, Enterprise Galvanizing "Galvabra" or
equivalent.
3.10 EMPTY CONDUITS
A. Provide 1,250-pound strength, 1/4-inch diameter braided yellow
polypropylene pull cord in empty conduits.
B. Provide a waterproof label on each end of the pull cords to indicate the
destination of the other end in addition to conduit labels.
3.11 OUTLETS FOR GENERAL WIRING
A. Use multi-gang boxes and device plates where several devices are
located in the same general area. Obtain back box requirements for
systems provided under other sections and provide them per those
requirements.
3.12 UNDERGROUND PULL BOXES
A. Set handholes and pull boxes level on a crushed rock base 18 inches thick
with horizontal dimensions same as bottom of handhole plus 12 inches all
around. Crushed rock shall be 3/4-inch maximum size, 1/4" minimum size.
Set units parallel or perpendicular with adjacent structures.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
179
B. Seal pull box joints located between box cover, extension and bottom with
joint sealing compound.
C. Install covers flush within finished paved or concrete surfaces. In
unfinished areas, install covers one inch (1") above finished grade.
D. Prior to project completion, clean out debris and dirt in pull boxes with
concrete bottoms.
3.13 UNDERGROUND CONDUITS
A. Provide 24-inch-minimum cover at finished grade for direct burial
underground conduit. Provide 3-inch-minimum sand above and below
conduit.
B. Provide 24-inch minimum cover at finished grade above top of concrete
for concrete-encased duct banks. Provide 2-inch minimum separation
between conduits and 3-inch minimum concrete encasement around
conduits. Extend the concrete encasement under any floor slabs or
equipment mounting pads to the point of raceway termination. After the
concrete envelope has set, pull a bristle brush through each raceway to
remove debris. Underground conduits shall be concrete encased unless
shown as direct buried on the Drawings.
C. Where other utility piping systems are encountered or being installed
along a raceway route, maintain a 12-inch-minimum vertical separation
between raceways and other systems at crossings. Maintain a
12-inch-minimum separation between raceways and other systems in parallel runs. Do not
place raceways over valves or couplings in other piping systems. Refer conflicts with these
requirements to the Engineer for instructions before further work is done.
D. Thoroughly clean conduits before lying. During construction and after
completion, the conduit ends shall be kept plugged to prevent water from
washing mud into the manholes or pull boxes.
E. Terminate conduit in end bells in manholes and pull boxes and enter at
right angles to the wall.
F. Place conduit separators every 4 feet on centers and securely anchor to
prevent movement.
G. Backfill, Non-paved Areas: Use native backfill, compacted in 6-inch layers
to 90 percent relative compaction. Final backfill elevation shall match
existing.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
180
H. Backfill, Paved Areas:
1. Use clean imported sand having the following gradation:
Sieve Size Percent Passing By Weight
3/8 inch 100
No. 4 75 - 100
No. 30 12 - 50
No. 100 5 - 20
No. 200 0 - 15
Imported sand shall be free from organic material, trash, debris and
rubbish.
2. Compact trench backfill by manual methods. Water flooding or
jetting is not permitted.
3.14 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify conduits with conduit tags at the following locations:
1. Conduit stub ups within electrical equipment
2. Underground pull boxes and handholes
3. Within 12 inches at entrances into electrical equipment, field
devices, pull boxes and junction boxes
B. Every conduit shall be labeled at both ends.
3.15 WARNING TAPES
A. Bury warning tapes approximately 12 inches below grade, above all
underground conduits and duct banks. Align parallel to and within 3 inches
of the centerline of the conduit or duct bank.
B. Warning tape shall be yellow, 6-inch minimum width. Utilize tape made of
material resistant to corrosive soil. Use tape with printed warning that an
electric circuit is located below the tape. Manufacturers and types: ITT
Blackburn Type YT, Griffolyn Co., Terra-Tape, or equivalent.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
181
3.16 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation of raceways and boxes, inspect interiors of
raceways and boxes; clear all blockages and remove burrs, dirt, and
vacuum clean any construction debris.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
182
SECTION 16123 WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Wires and cables, 600 volts and less
B. Related Work:
1. Section 16010: General Electrical Requirements
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010.
B. Submit catalog cuts and material list for each conductor type. Indicate
insulation material, conductor material, voltage rating, manufacturer and
other data pertinent to the specific cable, such as shielding type, number
of pairs and applicable standards.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Wires and cables shall comply with Section 16010.
2.2 POWER WIRE
A. Conductor material: Class B stranded, soft annealed copper per ASTM
B-3.
B. Insulation: THHN/THWN-2, 600-volt insulated, color coded per Part 3:
Identification.
C. Minimum conductor size: No. 12 AWG.
2.3 CONTROL WIRE (EXTERNAL TO CONTROL PANEL)
A. Conductor: Class B stranded soft annealed copper per ASTM B-3.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
183
B. Insulation: THHN/THWN-2, 600-volt insulated, color coded per Part 3:
Identification.
C. Minimum Conductor Size: No 14 AWG.
2.4 CONTROL WIRE (CONNECTIONS WITHIN CONTROL PANEL)
A. Conductor: Stranded Soft Annealed Copper.
B. Insulation: Type THHN or THW, color code shown on Drawings of the
RTU control panel.
C. Minimum Conductor Size: No. 14 AWG.
2.5 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE – ALL LOCATIONS
A. Provide PVC coated shielded twisted pair, No. 16 AWG, 300 volt rated,
Belden 8719 or equivalent.
B. Provide PVC coated shielded twisted triad, No. 16 AWG, 300 volt rated,
Belden 9366 or equivalent.
2.6 CONDUCTOR CONNECTOR/SPLICES
A. Aboveground Dry and Damp Locations, #10 AWG and Smaller: Wire nuts,
3M "Scotchlock", Ideal "Super Nut", Buchanan "B-Cap", or equivalent.
B. Aboveground Dry and Damp Locations, #8 AWG and Larger:
1. Use one piece, standard length barrel, copper compression splice.
Provide Thomas and Betts two way connectors, Burndy "Hylink",
Teledyne "Penn-Union Penn Crimps" or equivalent.
C. In-ground Handholes and Pull Boxes, #10 AWG and smaller: As specified
above plus sealing with individual sealing packs of Scotchcast 400 Resin
or equivalent.
2.7 PULLING COMPOUND
A. Use only cable pulling compound that is approved by the manufacturer of
the cable as being compatible with cable insulation and jacket materials.
2.8 CONDUCTOR TAGS
A. Wire identification - all wires, field and internal to equipment, shall be
identified with heat shrinkable machine printed sleeve markers or clip-on
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
184
markers covered with clear plastic heat shrinkable tubing. Hand lettered wire labels
are not acceptable and shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. All wires that
are electrically the same (connected to common termination points) and do not pass
through a contact or other switching device shall have the same wire identification.
B. The wire labeling code for each end of the same wire shall be identical.
Tubing shall be sized for the wire and shrunk into place with the properly
sized heat gun. The wire identification code for field and panel wiring shall
be the number/letter designated on the "elementary" (schematics) and
"loop" diagrams. Wire labels shall be T&B SM series, Raychem Thermofit
TMS or approved equal.
2.9 ELECTRICAL TAPE/SHRINKABLE INSULATORS
A. Vinyl Tape: 7 mil, 600 volt rated, flame retardant, hot and cold weather
resistant vinyl tape conforming to UL 510. Provide 3M Super 33+ Scotch
vinyl tape or equivalent.
B. Vinyl Tape for Color Coding: 7 mil, 3/4" wide, hot and cold weather
resistant vinyl tape conforming to UL 510. Provide 3M 35 Scotch vinyl tape
or equivalent.
C. Vinyl Mastic: 90 or 125 mil self fusing, rubber based insulating vinyl mastic
laminated to PVC. Provide 3M 2200 or 2210 or equivalent.
D. Rubber Tape: EPR rubber, 90 degrees C continuous rated. Provide 3M
130C Scotch Tape or equivalent.
E. Varnished Cambric Type: Adhesive backed, 9-mil, bias cut cotton tape,
coated with yellow insulating varnish.
F. Shrinkable Insulators: Provide heat or cold shrinkable insulator tubing.
Provide Thomas and Belts "Shrink-Kon" heat shrink insulators, 3M thick
wall heat shrinkable cable sleeves, 3M 8420 series cold shrink cable
sleeves or equivalent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WIRE INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring and cable in conduit unless otherwise noted.
B. To reduce pulling tension in long runs, coat cables with pulling compound.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
185
C. Remove debris and moisture from the conduits, boxes and cabinets prior
to cable installation.
D. Group conductors in panelboards, cabinets, pull boxes and wireways; tie
with plastic ties; and fan out to terminals.
E. Terminate phase conductors A, B and C reading left to right, front to back
or top to bottom looking into the front of the equipment.
F. Install control wire and instrument cable between devices without splices.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Color Coding of Power Wire: Provide color coding throughout the entire
network of feeders and circuits (600 volts and below) as follows:
240/120 208/120 480/277
Phase Volts Volts Volts
Phase A Black Black Brown
Phase B Red Red Orange
Phase C --- Blue Yellow
Neutral White White Gray
Ground Green Green Green
B. Conductors used for 24 VDC shall be blue. Conductors designated, as
foreign voltage shall be yellow.
C. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller shall have factory color-coding with
solid color insulation.
D. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall have factory color coding with
solid color insulation or shall have black insulation with on-site application
of colored tape at conductor terminations and at splices.
E. Control wires shall have colored insulation. Provide separate color codes
for each wire in conduit that has up to seven wires. Conduits with more
than seven wires shall have at least seven types of colored insulation.
F. Tagging of Conductors: Tag control wires and instrument cable in panels,
pullboxes, handholes, wireways and at control devices. Tag control wires
and instrument cables with wire numbers as shown on the shop drawing
submittals or contract drawings. Tag power wires in pullboxes, handholes
and wireways with panelboard number and circuit numbers. In
panelboards, tag conductors with circuit numbers one inch from
termination at circuit breaker.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
186
3.3 WIRE SPLICING AND CONNECTING
A. Tighten electrical connections and terminals, including screws and bolts,
in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values.
Where manufacturer's torqueing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL
486A and UL 486B, or NETA Standards.
B. Retighten bolt-type connectors 24 to 48 hours after initial installation and
before taping.
C. Insulate splices with tape or shrinkable insulators. Tape connections as
follows: Step 1 - apply a minimum of 4 layers of varnished cambric tape.
Step 2 - apply a minimum of six layers of rubber tape half-lapped. Step 3 -
apply a minimum of six layers of vinyl tape half-lapped.
3.4 INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS (CIRCUITS BELOW 600 VOLTS)
A. Perform insulation resistance test for each feeder circuit prior to energizing
per Section 16030.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, Section 7.3.
C. Perform insulation resistance test of all systems up to 600V. Each
complete circuit, including the feeder and everything connected thereto,
shall be tested and shall have an insulation resistance between
conductors and between each conductor and ground of not less than
2,000,000 ohms (2 megohms). All circuits which do not pass this test
shall be inspected for grounds; and if required, the Contractor shall
replace the wires or cables and repeat the test until insulation resistance
of 2 megohms is obtained.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
187
SECTION 16235 ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency
power supply with the following features:
1. Diesel engine.
2. Unit-mounted cooling system.
3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring.
4. Sound attenuated outdoor enclosure.
B. The engine-generator shall be equipped with the necessary devices to
meet current local Air Pollution Control District (APCD) regulations for
the operation of a standby diesel generator.
C. Contractor shall obtain a general permit registration number to submit
application, pay for, and obtain an APCD permit from San Luis Obispo
County to construct and operate the standby generator.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 16413 "Transfer Switch" for transfer switches including
sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping
signals for engine-generator sets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS:
A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest
value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed
as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
188
1. Thermal damage curve for generator.
2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,
weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-
generator set and other components specified.
2. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified
professional engineer. Calculate requirements for selecting
vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing
vibration isolation bases.
3. Fuel Tank Base Details: Detail fabrication, including
anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported
equipment. Include base weights.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
5. Fuel tank mounting and bracing details.
6. Fuel pipe and sensor installation and runs details.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification
that complete engine-generator set, batteries, battery racks,
accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in
Structural Contract Documents. Equipment Importance Factor = 1.0
shall be the basis of the equipment IBC certification.
1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify
center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and
anchorage provisions.
2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which
the certification is based and their installation requirements.
3. Provide mounting detail and calculation with all necessary
details for mounting to concrete pad. The information shall be
produced by a structural engineer, licensed in state of
California.
D. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer & Dealer.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
189
1. This generator shall be Cummins or Owner approved equal and
who has been regularly engaged in the production of engine-
generator sets and associated controls for a minimum of twenty
years, thereby identifying one source of supply and
responsibility. EQUAL means, having the same system
configuration, operation, footprint of the genset, SKVA rating,
fuel consumption, exhaust emissions, same sound emission
data of the genset with same sizing solution. Alternate offerings
must be submitted for approval 7 days prior to bid. Generator
manufacturer not approved prior to bid date will be rejected.
2. The manufacturer shall provide factory-trained service and parts
support through a factory authorized dealer/supplier that is
regularly doing business within 25 miles of the installation.
3. The manufacturer shall have printed literature and brochures
describing the standard system specified, not a one of a kind
fabrication.
4. As part of qualification process; an authorized dealer/supplier,
herein known as the dealer shall represent the manufacturer. To
qualify as the dealer/supplier, it must be an authorized Cummins
supplier and shall have 24-hour service availability. The
dealer/supplier must have certified generator service
technicians, inventory of parts to support after sales service with
additional Factory parts distribution center within 50 miles and
can prove 25 years of experience in the engine generator field.
E. Source quality-control test reports.
1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report.
2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that
are equivalent, but not identical, to those tested on prototype
unit.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
H. Acoustic Data
1. Engine generator noise data, including unsilenced combustion
exhaust and mechanical noise with engine and radiator.
2. Engine generator muffler octave band insertion loss values at
project specific required flow.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
190
3. The overall acoustic performance of the enclosure shall be
designs to reduce the generator unsilenced noise level to 70
dba when measured at a distance of 23 ft. from all sides of the
enclosure and 5 ½ ft. above grade. Acoustical Calculations must
be provided with the submittal package showing SPL values for
the given noise performance. The reports shall include a wall
Transmission Loss, Silencer Analysis Intake and Discharge.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In
addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. List of tools and replacement items recommended being stored
at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers,
current unit prices, and source of supply.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer
than one of each.
2. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air
filters.
3. Belts: One set of each alternator and fan belt.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who
is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than one (1) hour normal
travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within
10 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing testing,
training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary
components through one source from a single manufacturer.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
191
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled
as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with ASME B15.1.
F. Comply with NFPA 37.
G. Comply with NFPA 70.
H. Comply with NFPA 99.
I. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power
supply system.
J. Comply with UL 2200.
K. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local
government requirements.
L. Noise Emission: Comply to meet 70 dba maximum noise level at 23ft.
due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine
exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other
components of installation.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand
the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical
damage or degradation of performance capability:
1. Ambient Temperature: 40º C
2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 40 percent.
3. Altitude: 434’.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine
generators and radiator mounted on grade. Concrete, reinforcement,
and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators
and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
192
1. Warranty Period: 5 years comprehensive extended warranty (diesel
generator) from date of substantial completion.
1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion,
provide one (1) year full maintenance by skilled employees of
manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly
exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under
load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by
manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide
parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and
installation of original equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide Cummins Model C50D6C-50kW with alternator BB90-2, 60Hz,
120/240VAC, single phase at 1.0PF standby or a comparable product
by one of the following:
1. Cummins.
2. Or Owner approved equal fourteen (14) days prior to bid date.
2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET Steel material shall comply with UL 845 and
CSA requirements.
A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.
B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without
depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments.
1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently
attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting
capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of
gravity.
C. Capacities and Characteristics:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
193
1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with
capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by
records of prototype testing.
2. Output Connections: Single-phase, 3-wire.
3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify
manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial
number of component.
D. Generator-Set Performance:
1. Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of
the engine is permissible to meet specified performance.
a. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings
required by the Contract Documents rather than ratings
that would normally be applied to generator size installed.
b. Alternator must have a maximum temperature rise of
120˚C
2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: +/- 1 percent of
rated output voltage from no load to full load.
3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent
variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage
shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band
within 3 seconds when tested with the Diesel Engine.
4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: +/- 0.50
percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.
5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at
any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no
random speed variations outside the steady-state operational
band and no hunting or surging of speed.
6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5% variation for
50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall
recover and remain within the steady-state operating band
within three seconds.
7. Output Waveform: AC waveform Total Harmonic Distortion shall
not exceed 5 percent total from no load to full linear load.
Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG
1-22.43, shall not exceed 50 percent.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
194
8. Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage
distortion caused by nonlinear load.
a. Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to
voltage regulator.
9. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, (10 seconds)
system requirements.
E. Generator Mechanical Design:
Mechanical design shall be able to withstand rotor over speed,
acceleration, and short circuit fault of the generator.
1. Generator construction shall be:
a. Synchronous
b. Four pole
c. Revolving field
d. Aluminum Sound Level 2 enclosure with air intake
filtration and drip-proof air exhaust
e. Drip-proof construction with corrosion resistant hardware
f. Air-cooled by direct drive, centrifugal, non-sparking, non-
plastic, blower fan.
g. Direct coupled to engine with flexible disc (coupling)
2. Windings, winding termination leads, and amortisseur ring shall
be copper.
2.3 ENGINE
A. The engine shall be charge air cooled, diesel fueled, turbocharged
after cooled engines of 4-cycle design TIER 3 compliance engine. The
engine will have a cast iron, in-line 4 cylinder block with a minimum
displacement of 4.5 liters (272 cubic inches). The units shall require a
minimum rated standby output of 50 kW at an operating speed of 1800
RPM. The engine governor regulation class shall be ISO8528 Part 1
Class G3.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
195
B. The engine shall be capable of satisfactory performance on No. 2 fuel
oil (EMA FPQ-1a or b). Diesel engines requiring a premium fuel will not
be considered.
C. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.
D. Overspeed limit: 2250 rpm.
E. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or
skid:
1. Lube oil filter type: Spin-on with relief valve
2. Extension – oil drain
F. Engine Fuel System:
1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate
primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions.
2. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel
line and returns excess fuel to source.
G. Coolant heater
H. Governor: Electronic type, with speed sensing
I. Cooling System: Charge air cooled, with radiator factory mounted on
engine-generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven
coolant pump.
1. Ambient design: 50 degrees C
2. Fan load: 5.22 kW
3. Coolant capacity (with radiator): 16 L
4. Cooling system air flow: 218.04 cubic meters/min
J. Air-Intake Filter: Standard-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with
replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.
K. Starting System:
1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full
engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum
specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
196
2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and
releases from engine flywheel without binding.
3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level
specified.
4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range
specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article to provide
specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging.
5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer
for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting
conductors and connection accessories.
6. Battery Compartment: Factory supplied as part of IBC certified
package. Include accessories required to support and fasten
batteries in place.
7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with
solid-state voltage regulation and 100-A minimum continuous
rating.
8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and
float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include
the following features:
a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be
initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until
an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery
terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a
lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate
in that mode until battery is discharged again.
b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and
equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature
from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent
overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at
low temperatures.
c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output
voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus
or minus 10 percent.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters
shall indicate charging rates.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
197
e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage
and close contacts providing low battery voltage
indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high
battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery
charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide
a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control
and monitoring panel.
f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 3R (IP20).
2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE
A. The tank shall be the Cummins C301-2 #A053L909 Regional fuel tank
or approved equal, and manufactured in compliance with the following
codes and stand-ards:
1. UL 142 – Underwriters Laboratories Standard
2. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids
3. NFPA 37 - The Standard for Installation and use of Stationary
Combustible Engine and Gas Turbines
4. NFPA110 – The Standard for Standby and Emergency Power
Systems
B. Provide a dual wall, secondary containment sub base fuel storage tank
with a 250 gallon usable capacity. The tank shall be constructed of
corrosion resistant steel and shall be UL 142 listed and labeled. Tank
base dimension is 40” W X 154” L X 18” H. The fuel tank shall include
the following features:
1. (2) Electrical stub ups – One (1) for main line power (24” x 36”)
and One (1) for load center (12” x 12”). Removable top cover
plates shall be provided for both
2. Normal & emergency vents - Vents shall be extended a
minimum of 12 ft above bottom of the tank
3. Two (2) removable fuel supply & return dip tubes
4. 2” Lockable fuel fill
5. 5 gallon Spill Containment with lockable lid
6. Signage/Labeling: "Diesel Fuel, Flammable, No Smoking" &
NFPA Label
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
198
7. Emergency tank and basin vents
8. Mechanical Fuel level gauge
9. High (90%) and low (40%) level float switches to indicate fuel
level
10. Leak detector switch
11. Basin drain
12. Integral lifting provisions
C. Tank construction shall consist of reinforced steel channel with a 5,000
lbs. load rating per generator set mounting hole location. The tank shall
include full height gussets at each generator set mounting hole
location.
D. Sub base tank shall include a welded steel containment basin, sized at
a minimum of 125% of the tank capacity to prevent escape of fuel into
the environment in the event of a tank rupture.
E. The tank interior shall be finished rust proofing epoxy coating. The tank
shall be painted as per the following procedure:
All carbon steel surfaces shall be power tool cleaned per sspc-sp3 and painted as
follows:
1. Prime – one coat of Primer 2 (2-4 mils DFT)
2. Intermediate – one coat of Industrial Polyurethane (Ameron
Amerlock 2) (1-1.5 mils DFT)
3. Finished – one coat of Ameron PSX 700 Polyurethane texture
(2-3 mils DFT)
4. Finish color to match sound enclosure (or gloss black)
Finish coat performance shall be capable of showing no signs of blistering after
5500 hours of salt spray (ASTM B117). Primer and Finish coat paint specification
sheets shall be provided with the submittal.
2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Provide a fully solid-state, microprocessor based, generator set
mounted control. The control panel shall be the Control system
PowerCommand 2.3, designed and built by the engine manufacturer.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
199
The control shall provide all operating, monitoring, and control
functions for the generator set. The control panel shall provide real
time digital communications to all engine and regulator controls via
PCCNet RS485 connections using Belden 9729 two pair, stranded,
shielded 24 AWG twisted pair cable.
1. Need to provide form C dry contacts to get generator run status
to project centrol controller.
B. The generator set control shall be tested and certified to the following
environmental conditions:
1. –40°C to +70°C Operating Range
2. 10% to 95% non-condensing humidity
3. Altitudes up to 13,000 feet
4. IP22 protection for rear of controller; IP55 when installed in
control panel
5. 5% salt spray, 48 hours, +38°C, 36.8V system voltage
6. Sinusoidal vibration 4.3G's RMS, 24-1000Hz
7. Electromagnetic Capability (89/336/EEC, 91/368/EEC,
93/44/EEC, 93/68/EEC, BS EN 50081-2, 50082-2)
C. The following functionality shall be integral to the control panel.
1. The control shall include a 320 x 240 pixel graphic LED
backlight LCD display with push button access for viewing
engine and alternator data and providing setup, controls and
adjustments
2. The control shall include a minimum of 3-line data display
3. Audible horn for alarm and shutdown with horn silence switch
4. Standard ISO labeling
5. Multiple language capability (English, Spanish or French)
6. Remote start/stop control
7. Local run/off/auto control integral to system microprocessor
8. Cooldown timer
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
200
9. Speed adjust
10. Lamp test
11. Emergency stop push button
12. Digital voltage regulation
13. Password protected system programming
D. The controls shall provide the following digital readouts for the engine
and generator. All readings shall be indicated in either metric or
English units
1. Engine
a. DC voltage
b. Lube oil pressure
c. Coolant temperature
2. Generator
a. Line-to-line and line-to-neutral AC volts
b. 3-phase AC current
c. Frequency
d. kVA
e. kW
f. Power Factor
3. Other
a. Generator set model data
b. Start attempts, starts, running hours
c. Fault history
d. RS485 Modbus interface
e. Data logging and fault simulation
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
201
E. The control shall monitor and provide alarm indication and subsequent
shutdown for the following conditions. All alarms and shutdowns are
accompanied by a time, date, and engine hour stamp that are stored
by the control panel for first and last occurrence:
1. AC protection
a. AmpSentry protective relay
b. Over current warning and shutdown
c. Over and under voltage shutdown
d. Over and under frequency shutdown
e. Over excitation (loss of sensing) fault
f. Field overload
g. Overload warning
h. Reverse kW shutdown
i. Reverse Var shutdown
j. Short circuit protection
2. Engine protection
a. Overspeed shutdown
b. Low oil pressure warning and shutdown
c. High coolant temperature warning and shutdown
d. Low coolant level warning or shutdown
e. Low coolant temperature warning
f. High, low and weak battery voltage warning
g. Fail to start (overcrank) shutdown
h. Fail to crank shutdown
i. Redundant start disconnect
j. Cranking lockout
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
202
k. Sensor failure indication
l. Low fuel level warning or shutdown
m. Emergency stop
n. Fuel-in-rupture-basin warning or shutdown
F. The Controller shall include the ability to accept programmable digital
input signals. The signals may be programmed for either high or low
activation using programmable Normally Open or Normally Closed
contacts.
1. The control shall include the ability to operate auxiliary
configurable signal inputs (8) and relay outputs (8)
G. All engine, voltage regulator, control panel and accessory units shall
be accessible through a single electronic service tool. The following
maintenance functionality shall be integral to the generator set control
1. Engine running hours display
2. Engine crank attempt counter
3. Engine successful starts counter
H. Remote Communications: The control shall include RS485 Modbus
communications as standard via RS-485 half duplex.
I. Local Annunciator (NFPA 99/110, CSA 282): Provide a local, control
panel mounted, annunciator to meet the requirements of NFPA 110,
Level 1.
1. Annunciators shall be networked directly to the generator set
control
2. Local Annunciator shall include a lamp test pushbutton, alarm
horn and alarm acknowledge pushbutton
3. Provide the following individual light indications for protection
and diagnostics
a. Genset Supplying Load
b. Charger AC Failure
c. Low Coolant Level
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
203
d. Low Fuel Level
e. Check Genset
f. Not In Auto
g. Genset Running
h. High Battery Voltage
i. Low Battery Voltage
j. Weak Battery
k. Fail to Start
l. Low Coolant Temp
m. Pre-High Engine Temp
n. High Engine Temp
o. Pre-low Oil Pressure
p. Low Oil Pressure
q. Overspeed
r. Custom Relay 1
s. Custom Relay 2
t. Custom Relay 3
u. Custom Relay 4
J. Remote Annunciator (NFPA 99/110, CSA 282) Provide a remote
annunciator to meet the requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1.
1. The annunciator shall provide remote annunciation of all points
stated above and shall incorporate ring-back capability so that
after silencing the initial alarm, any subsequent alarms will
sound the horn.
2. Ability to be located up to 4000 ft from the generator set
2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
204
A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic; 80 percent
continuous current rated; complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.
1. Manufacturer/Model: Square D JDL36225, Molded case circuit
breaker 600V 225A, or approved equal.
2. Range of product: PowerPact J
3. Trip unit technology: Thermal-magnetic
4. Trip Rating: 225A.
5. Breaking capacity code: D
6. Mounting: Unit mount
B. Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System"
signals for ground-fault. Integrate ground-fault alarm indication with
other generator-set alarm indications.
2.7 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE
A. One sound-attenuated enclosure shall be provided which shall enclose
the 50 kW diesel generator set. The enclosure shall allow the
generator set to operate at full rated load under the following Design
Criteria:
1. F217-2 Sount Attenuated Level 2, Aluminum.
2. Durable powder coat paint, anti-corrosion performance.
3. Rigidity: Wind load resistant to 180 mph, per ASCE7-10.
4. Performance of the enclosures are designed to reduce the gen-
set equipment unsilenced noise levels to 70.3 dBA at a distance
of 7 feet from the enclosure, in a free field environment.
B. The enclosure will meet the following fire related parameters, per
NFPA No. 255 or ASTM E84, flame spread = 15, smoke developed = 0
and fuel contributed = 0.
C. ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY:
1. The Cummins F217-2 enclosure is pre-assembled, pre-
integrated and delivered as part of the entire power system.
D. CONSTRUCTION:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
205
1. Construction of the enclosure will consist of 4” thick acoustical
weather tight wall and roof panels fabricated of 14 gauge
galvannealed steel outer skin. Panels are packed with 4 lbs./cu.
ft. density mineral wool acoustical insulation which is protected
by a 2 mil poly film liner installed between the perforated inner
skin and the insulation material. The enclosure framing will
consist of an all welded A-36 structural steel tubing and base
channel members. Four (4) lifting lugs, designed to lift the total
enclosure weight, are provided. The base channel will be
provided with mounting holes that will allow the enclosure to
fasten directly to the base skid, tank or foundation.
2. Wall panels will consist of 16” wide individual formed sections
for rigidity and wall flatness; panels will be skip welded together
inside and caulked weather tight outside.
3. Standing seam roof with formed channel roof members (sized to
accommodate loading). Exclusive seal welded roof construction.
4. Inlet and discharge weather louvers will be 7” deep in direction
of airflow with blades positioned on a 45-degree angle for water
run-off.
5. Engine exhaust roof opening(s) with stainless steel weather
covers.
6. Roof mounting muffler support channels-two (2) for each
enclosure.
7. Rain lips over all exterior doors.
E. HARDWARE: All doors will be factory mounted and will be furnished
with the following:
1. Hinges: Component Hardware Group, Heavy duty, 316 stainless
steel.
2. Latches: Component Hardware Group, Heavy duty, 316
stainless steel construction with panic hardware on the interior
side.
3. The doors shall be fitted with Neoprene gasket around the
perimeter of the door. Double sealed when required.
4. All door hinges, latches, and devices shall be secured with
stainless steel bolting hardware.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
206
5. Door holdbacks when possible.
F. STANDARD ENCLOSURE PAINTING
1. All exterior enclosure galvannealed surfaces will be solvent
cleaned and painted as follows:
a. Base coat – one coat of American Coatings Polyurethane
(1-1.5 mils DFT).
b. Top coat – one coat of American Coatings Polyurethane
(0.5-1 mils DFT).
2. All carbon steel surfaces to be cleaned per SSPC-SP3 and
painted with the following:
a. Primer – one coat American Coatings Industrial Primer
(3-4 mils DFT).
b. Intermediate & top coat to be the same as above.
3. Interior enclosure wall surfaces will not be painted.
G. MANUFACTURER:
1. Cummins, or approved equal.
H. Oil and Water Drains:
1. Enclosure manufacturer shall extend lube oil and coolant drains
to the couplings with flexible hose and shall include a brass ball
valve on the inside of the enclosure and a drain plug on the
outside. The couplings shall be labeled for each.
2. Terminate crankcase breather tubes in the radiator discharge air
stream.
I. Enclosure electrical package shall include:
1. One (1) 120/240V, 1 Phase Load Center
2. Four (4) Interior fluorescent light fixtures with two 4 foot bulbs
wired to AC panel
3. Two (2) light switches 3-way
4. Two (2) 20 Amp GFCI duplex receptacles
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
207
5. All electrical devices including gen-set ancillary loads shall be
pre-wired before shipment.
6. All generator auxiliary loads shall be wired to the AC load panel
for customer connection via EMT galvanized conduit with EMT
connections. All electrical shall be rated weather tight.
2.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES
A. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, Caldyn open-spring
isolators with seismic restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring
extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-
drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, elastomeric
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable
equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking
during installation.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of
compressed height of the spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at
rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical
stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully
compressed, without deformation or failure.
6. Mounted between the generator skid and the sub-base fuel
tank.
2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same
engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and
equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.
1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and
with IEEE 115.
B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test
engine-generator set and other system components and accessories
manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load
and power factor for a minimum of 2 hours. Include the following tests:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
208
1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit
that are not identical to those on tested prototype to
demonstrate compatibility and reliability.
2. Full load run.
3. Maximum power.
4. Voltage regulation.
5. Transient and steady-state governing.
6. Single-step load pickup. Retain subparagraph below if factory
tests will be witnessed by Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections.
Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-
generator installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written
installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.
B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing
connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.
C. Install packaged engine generator sub-base fuel tank based on CA
Structural PE Engineer stamped anchoring calculation. Secure sets to
anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Concrete base construction is
shown on Design drawings.
D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment
manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
209
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to
packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect cooling-system water piping to engine-generator set and
radiator with flexible connectors.
D. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.
E. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible
connector.
F. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
G. Connect wiring according to Section 16123 "Cables."
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components according to Section 16010 "General
Electrical."
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies,
and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in
writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized
service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and
equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by
NFPA 110 including, but not limited to, 4-hour load test and
single-step full-load pickup test.
a. 2 Hour O & M training
b. 2 Hour load bank testing
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
210
c. 2 Hour building load testing.
2. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell
voltages.
a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between
available battery terminals for full-charging and float-
charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific
gravity under both conditions.
b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an
integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.
c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the
battery after discharge.
d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's
specifications.
3. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both
equalizing and float-charging conditions.
4. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation,
connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator
system before and during system operation. Check for air,
exhaust, and fluid leaks.
5. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording
oscilloscope or Factory computer software “Electronic
Technician” to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50
and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify
that performance is as specified.
D. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them
concurrently.
E. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months,
traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive
observation of test results. Make calibration records available for
examination on request.
F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start
units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
211
H. Remove and replace malfunctioning components and retest as
specified above.
I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and
retest until specified requirements are met.
J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable
relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and
other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested
component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged
engine generators for a minimum of four (4) hours.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
212
SECTION 16413 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including
the following:
1. Automatic transfer switches
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 16060 – Grounding
2. Section 16235 – Engine Generators
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated
capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,
and accessories.
1. Technical data on all major components of all transfer switches
and other products described in this section. Data is required
for the transfer switch mechanism, control system, cabinet, and
protective devices specifically listed for use with each transfer
switch. Include steady state and fault current ratings, weights,
operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
2. Single Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer
switch, power sources and load
B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details
showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter
space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch
specified.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
213
1. Dimensioned outline drawings of assembly, including
elevations, sections, and details including minimal clearances,
conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and
devices and material lists for each switch specified.
2. Internal electrical wiring and control drawings.
3. Interconnection wiring diagrams, showing recommended
conduit runs and point-to-point terminal connections to
generator set.
4. Installation and mounting instructions, including information for
proper installation of equipment to meet seismic requirements.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification
that transfer switches accessories, and components will withstand
seismic forces. Include the following:
1. Seismic certification, as required for site conditions. Seismic
certifications shall be third-party certified, and based on testing.
Certification based on calculations does not meet this
requirement.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place
without separation of any parts from the device when
subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will
be fully operational both during and after the seismic
event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify
center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and
anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which
the certification is based and their installation requirements.
Coordinate paragraph below with qualification requirements in
Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" and as
supplemented in "Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Manufacturer and Supplier Qualification Data
1. The transfer switch manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001
International Quality Standard and shall have third party
certification verifying quality assurance in design/development,
production, installation, and service, in accordance with ISO
9001.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
214
2. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar
equipment for a minimum period of 10 years. When requested,
an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be
provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to
items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance
Data," include the following:
1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
2. List of all factory settings of relays, timers and protective
devices; provide setting and calibration instructions where
applicable.
F. Warranty documents demonstrating compliance with the project’s
contract requirements.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout Procedures
B. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:
1. Final (as-built) drawings and information for items listed in
Section 1.5
2. Wiring diagrams
3. Certified production test reports
4. Installation information
5. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details
C. Submit ten (10) copies of the above information.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The equipment supplier shall maintain a
service center capable of providing training, parts, maintenance and
emergency repairs to equipment, including transfer switch generator
sets and remote monitoring equipment (if applicable) at the site within
a response period of less than (eight hours or appropriate time period
designated for Project) from time of notification.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
215
1. The transfer switch shall be serviced by technicians employed
by, and specially trained and certified by, the generator set
supplier and the supplier shall have a service organization that
is factory-certified in both generator set and transfer switch
service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of critical
replacement parts at the local service organization, and in
service vehicles. The service organization shall be on call 24
hours per day, 365 days per year.
2. Submit names, experience level, training certifications, and
locations for technicians that will be responsible for servicing
equipment at this site.
3. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number
records of each transfer switch provided for at least 20 years.
B. Source Limitations: All transfer switches are to be obtained through
one source from a single manufacturer. The generator set
manufacturer shall warrant transfer switches to provide a single source
of responsibility for products provided.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled
as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked as suitable for use in
emergency, legally required or optional standby use as appropriate for
the connected load.
D. The automatic transfer switch installation and application shall conform
to the requirements of the following codes and standards:
1. Transfer switches and enclosures shall be UL 1008 listed and
labeled as suitable for use in emergency, legally required, and
optional standby applications.
2. CSA 282, Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings, and
CSA C22.2, No. 14-M91 Industrial Control Equipment
3. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable
for use in systems in compliance with Articles 700, 701 and 702.
4. Comply with NEMA ICS 10-1993 AC Automatic Transfer
Switches
5. IBC 2012 – The transfer switch(es) shall be prototype-tested
and third-party certified to comply with the requirements of IBC
group III or IV, Category D/F. The equipment shall be shipped
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
216
with the installation instructions necessary to attain installation
compliance.
6. IEEE 446 – Recommended Practice for Emergency and
Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial
Applications
7. EN55011, Class B Radiated Emissions and Class B Conducted
Emissions
8. IEC 1000-4-5 (EN 61000-4-5); AC Surge Immunity
9. IEC 1000-4-4 (EN 61000-4-4) Fast Transients Immunity
10. IEC 1000-4-2 (EN 61000-4-2) Electrostatic Discharge Immunity
11. IEC 1000-4-3 (EN 61000-4-3) Radiated Field Immunity
12. IEC 1000-4-6 Conducted Field Immunity
13. IEC 1000-4-11 Voltage Dip Immunity
14. IEEE 62.41, AC Voltage Surge Immunity
15. IEEE 62.45, AC Voltage Surge Testing
E. Comply with NFPA 99 – Essential Electrical Systems for Healthcare
Facilities
F. Comply with NFPA 110 – Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
The transfer switch shall meet all requirements for Level 1 systems,
regardless of the actual circuit level.
G. The manufacturer shall warrant the material and workmanship of the
transfer switch equipment for a minimum of one (1) year from
registered commissioning and start-up, or eighteen (18) months from
date of shipment.
H. The warranty shall be comprehensive. No deductibles shall be allowed
for travel time, service hours, repair parts cost, and etc. during the
minimum noted warranty period described above.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical
service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted
under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary electrical service:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
217
1. Notify (Owner/Engineer/Construction Manager) no fewer than 7
days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without
(Owner/Engineer/Construction Manager’s) written permission.
3. Do not energize any new service or distribution equipment
without notification and permission of the
(Owner/Engineer/Construction Manager).
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Size and location of concrete bases and anchor bolt inserts shall be
coordinated. Concrete, reinforcement and formwork must meet the
requirements specified on Structural Plans. See section
"INSTALLATION" for additional information on installation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1. Cummins Power Generation
B. Equipment specifications for this Project are based on automatic
transfer switches manufactured by Cummins Power Generation.
Switches manufactured by other manufacturers that meet the
requirement of this specification are acceptable, if Owner approved not
less than two weeks before scheduled bid date. Proposals must
include a line-by-line compliance statement based on this specification.
C. Transfer switches utilizing molded case circuit breakers do not meet
the requirements of this specification and will not be accepted.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide transfer switches in the number and ratings that are shown on
the drawings.
B. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous
loading and total system transfer.
C. Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: UL 1008 WCR ratings
must be specifically listed as meeting the requirements for use with
protective devices at installation locations, under specified fault
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
218
conditions. Withstand and closing ratings shall be based on use of the same set of
contacts for the withstand test and the closing test.
D. Solid-State Controls: All settings should be accurate to +/- 2% or better
over an operating temperature range of - 40 to + 60 degrees C (- 40 to
+ 140 degrees F).
E. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet
or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested
according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-
impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.
F. Electrical Operation: Accomplished by a non-fused, momentarily
energized solenoid or electric motor operator mechanism,
mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions (except that
mechanical interlock is not required for closed transition switches).
G. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive
transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.
1. Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers, or
insulated case circuit breaker components are not acceptable.
2. Transfer switches shall be double-throw, electrically and
mechanically interlocked, and mechanically held in the Source 1
and Source 2 positions.
3. Main switch contacts shall be high pressure silver alloy.
Contact assemblies shall have arc chutes for positive arc
extinguishing. Arc chutes shall have insulating covers to
prevent inter-phase flashover.
4. Contacts shall be operated by a high-speed electrical
mechanism that causes contacts to open or close within three
electrical cycles from signal.
5. Transfer switch shall be provided with flame retardant
transparent covers to allow viewing of switch contact operation
but prevent direct contact with components that could be
operating at line voltage levels.
6. The transfer switch shall include the mechanical and control
provisions necessary to allow the device to be field-configured
for operating speed. Transfer switch operation with motor loads
shall be as is recommended in NEMA MG1.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
219
7. Phase angle monitoring/timing equipment is not an acceptable
substitute for this functionality
8. Transfer switches designated on the drawings as “3-pole” shall
be provided with a switched neutral pole which is switched
simultaneously with phase poles.
H. Factory wiring: Transfer switch internal wiring shall be composed of
pre-manufactured harnesses that are permanently marked for source
and destination. Harnesses shall be connected to the control system
by means of locking disconnect plug(s), to allow the control system to
be easily disconnected and serviced without disconnecting power from
the transfer switch mechanism
I. Terminals: Terminals shall be pressure type and appropriate for all
field wiring. Control wiring shall be equipped with suitable lugs, for
connection to terminal strips.
J. Enclosures: All enclosures shall be third-party certified for compliance
to NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated:
1. The enclosure shall provide wire bend space in compliance to
the latest version of NFPA70, regardless of the direction from
which the conduit enters the enclosure.
2. Exterior cabinet doors shall provide complete protection for the
system’s internal components. Doors must have permanently
mounted key-type latches. Bolted covers or doors are not
acceptable.
3. Transfer switches shall be provided in enclosures that are third
party certified for their intended environment per NEMA
requirements.
2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA
110.
B. Indicated current ratings:
1. Refer to the Project drawings for specifications on the sizes and
types of transfer switch equipment, withstand and closing
ratings, number of poles, voltage and ampere ratings, enclosure
type, and accessories.
2. Main contacts shall be rated for 600 VAC minimum.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
220
3. Transfer switches shall be rated to carry 100% of rated current
continuously in the enclosure supplied, in ambient temperatures
of -40 to +60 degrees C (-40 to +140 degrees F), relative
humidity up to 95% (non-condensing), and altitudes up to
10,000 feet (3000 meters).
C. Relay Signal: Control shall include provisions for addition of a pre-
transfer relay signal, adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds, to be provided if
necessary for elevator operation, based on equipment provided for the
project.
D. Neutral Switching: Transfer switches designated on the drawings as 3-
pole shall be provided with a switched neutral pole. The neutral pole
shall be of the same construction and have the same ratings as the
phase poles. All poles shall be switched simultaneously using a
common crossbar. Substitute equipment using overlapping neutral
contacts is not acceptable.
E. Automatic Transfer Switch Control Features
1. The transfer switch control system shall be configurable in the
field for any operating voltage level up to 600 VAC. Voltage
sensing shall be monitored based on the normal voltage at the
site. Systems that utilize voltage monitoring based on standard
voltage conditions that are not field configurable are not
acceptable.
2. All transfer switch sensing shall be configurable from an
operator panel or from a Windows XP or later PC-based service
tool. Designs utilizing DIP switches or other electromechanical
devices are not acceptable.
3. The transfer switch shall provide a relay contact signal prior to
transfer or re-transfer. The time period before and after transfer
shall be adjustable in a range of 0 to 60 seconds.
4. The control system shall be designed and prototype tested for
operation in ambient temperatures from - 40 degrees C to + 60
degrees C (- 40 to +140 degrees F). It shall be designed and
tested to comply with the requirements of the noted voltage and
RFI/EMI standards.
5. The control shall have optically isolated logic inputs, high
isolation transformers for AC inputs and relays on all outputs, to
provide optimum protection from line voltage surges, RFI and
EMI.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
221
6. The transfer switch network monitoring equipment, when
supplied, shall be provided with a battery-based auxiliary power
supply to allow monitoring of the transfer switch when both AC
power sources are non-operational.
7. The indicator panel LEDs shall display:
a. Which source the load is connected to (Source 1 or
Source 2)
b. Which source or sources are available
c. When switch is not set for automatic operation, the
control is disabled
d. When the switch is in test/exercise mode
8. The indicator shall have pushbuttons that allow the operator to
activate the following functions:
a. Activate pre-programmed test sequence
b. Override programmed delays, and immediately go to the
next operation
F. Transfer Switch Control Panel: The transfer switch shall have a
microprocessor-based control with a sealed membrane panel
incorporating pushbuttons for operator-controlled functions, and LED
lamps for system status indicators. Panel display and indicating lamps
shall include permanent labels.
G. Control Functions: Functions managed by the control shall include:
1. Engine start (prevents nuisance genset starts in the event of
momentary power fluctuation): 0 to 10 seconds (default 3 sec)
2. Transfer normal to emergency (allows genset to stabilize before
load is transferred): 0 to 300 seconds (default 5 sec)
3. Re-transfer emergency to normal (allows utility to stabilize
before load is transferred from genset): 0 to 30 minutes (default
10 min)
4. Engine cooldown: 0 to 30 minutes (default 10 min)
5. Programmed transition: 0 to 60 seconds (default 0 sec)
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
222
6. Under frequency sensing (emergency side):
a. Pickup: 90% of nominal frequency
b. Dropout: 85% of nominal frequency
H. Control features shall include:
1. Programmable genset exerciser: A field-programmable control
shall periodically start and run the generator with or without
transferring the load for a preset time period, then re-transfer
and shut down the generator after a preset cool-down period.
2. In event of a loss of power to the control, all control settings and
the engine start-time delay setting will be retained.
I. Control Interface
1. Provide one set Form C auxiliary contacts on both sides,
operated by transfer switch position, rated 10 amps 250 VAC.
J. Engine Starting Contacts
1. One isolated and normally closed pair of contacts rated 8A at 30
VDC minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic
requirements and according to seismic-restraint details.
B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.
1. Floor-mounted transfer switches (except drawout switches
supported by wheeled carriages, which must be rolled out at
floor level) shall be mounted on concrete bases complying with
the following requirements:
a. Concrete Bases: Construct concrete bases according
Structural Plans.
C. Annunciator Panel Mounting: Flush in wall, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Identify components according to Division 16 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
223
E. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser
clock.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and
conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer
switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes
at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required
wiring.
B. Field control connections shall be made on a common terminal block
that is clearly and permanently labeled.
C. Transfer switch shall be provided with AL/CU mechanical lugs sized to
accept the full output rating of the switch. Lugs shall be suitable for the
number and size of conductors shown on the drawings.
D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding."
E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables."
3.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prior to shipping, factory shall test and inspect components,
assembled switches, and associated equipment to ensure proper
operation.
B. Factory shall check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-
delay settings for compliance with specified requirements.
C. Factory shall perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS
1.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: The supplier of the transfer switch(es)
and associated equipment shall inspect, test, and adjust components,
assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
report results in writing.
B. Manufacturer’s representative shall perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
C. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, installer shall test for compliance with requirements.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
224
1. Perform recommended installation tests as recommended in
manufacturer’s installation and service manuals.
2. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and
operational function for each switch.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic
transfer switches and of emergency source with normal
source available.
b. Verify time-delay settings.
c. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic
engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay
on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down
and shutdown.
D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60
days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch.
Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to
portable scanner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up
infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of Substantial
Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to
measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from
normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that
identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results.
Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken,
and observations after remedial action.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. After generator set installation, the generator and transfer switch
supplier shall conduct a complete operation, basic maintenance, and
emergency service seminar covering generator set and transfer switch
equipment, for up to 10 people employed by the Owner.
1. The seminar shall include instruction on operation of the transfer
equipment, normal testing and exercise, adjustments to the
control system, and emergency operation procedures.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
225
2. The class duration shall be at least 8 hours in length, and
include practical operation with the installed equipment.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
226
SECTION 16470 LOW VOLTAGE PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Low voltage power panelboards
1.2 REFERENCES
The low voltage power panelboards and protection devices in this
specification are designed and manufactured according to latest revision
of the following standards (unless otherwise noted).
A. ANSI/NEMA PB 1, Panelboards
B. ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
C. Federal Specification W-C-375, Rev. B, Amend. 1, Circuit Breakers,
Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service
D. Federal Specification W-P 115, Rev. C, Panel, Power Distribution
E. Federal Specification W-S-865 - Heavy Duty Switches
F. UL 489, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
G. UL 50, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
H. UL 67, Panelboards
I. UL 98, Enclosed and Dead Front Switches
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Overcurrent Protective Device - Single pole circuit breaker. Example: A
2-pole device is considered 2 protective devices.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Equipment shall be dead front power panelboards for molded-case
circuit breakers.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
227
B. Panelboards shall meet service entrance requirements when specified.
C. Panelboards shall have integrated short circuit rating. Fully rated panel
rating is that of lowest rated device in panelboard. Series rating are for
the UL tested main-branch combination.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330. Submit outline
and dimensional drawings and conduit entry restrictions.
B. Show ratings and characteristics including voltage ratings, bussing
arrangements, continuous current ratings, fault current withstand ratings,
neutral bus rating, ground bar termination points, enclosure type, ratings
and arrangement of overcurrent protective devices and mounting
provisions.
C. Submit catalog cuts for circuit breakers and devices.
D. Submit nameplate inscriptions, sizes and mounting methods.
E. Submit panelboard schedule.
1.6 INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Manufacturer shall provide copies of installation, operation and
maintenance procedures to owner in accordance with Section 01730.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE (QUALIFICATIONS)
A. Manufacturer shall have specialized in the manufacture and assembly of
low voltage power panelboards for 25 years.
B. Low voltage power panelboards shall be listed and/or classified by
Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with standards listed in Article
1.02 of this specification.
C. Power panelboards shall be qualified for use in seismic areas.
1.8 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
Contractor shall deliver, store, protect, and handle products in accordance
with recommended practices listed in manufacturer's Installation and
Maintenance Manuals.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
228
A. Ship each low voltage power panelboard section in individual shipping
splits for ease of handling. Each panelboard section shall be mounted on
shipping skids and wrapped for protection.
B. Contractor shall inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within
specified time.
C. Contractor shall store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory protection
or cover with heavy canvas or plastic to keep out dirt, water, construction
debris, and traffic.
D. Contractor shall handle in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions to avoid damaging equipment, installed devices, and finish.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS (SITE ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS)
A. Follow (standards) service conditions before, during and after
panelboard installation.
B. Low voltage power panelboards shall be located in well-ventilated areas,
free from excess humidity, dust and dirt and away from hazardous
materials. Ambient temperature of area will be between 0 and 35 degrees
C. Indoor locations shall be protected to prevent moisture from entering
enclosure.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer warrants equipment to be free from defects in materials
and workmanship for 1 year from date of installation or 18 months from
date of purchase, whichever occurs first.
1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Contractor shall make all necessary field measurements to verify that
equipment shall fit in allocated space in full compliance with minimum
required clearances specified in National Electrical Code.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Eaton.
B. Square D.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
229
C. Owner approved equal.
2.2 MANUFACTURED ASSEMBLIES
A. Furnish Low Voltage Power Panelboards as indicated in drawings.
2.3 COMPONENTS
Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and
components; current ratings of devices, bus bars, and components;
voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other
required details.
A. Enclosures
1. Panel box shall be galvanealed code gauge sheet steel with
removable end walls.
2. Enclosures shall be surface mounted or floor mounted.
3. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1, unless otherwise specified.
4. Fronts
a. Provide a lockable hinged door with semi-concealed hinges
to cover access to circuit breakers.
b. Hinged door fronts, when specified, shall be provided with a
front-hinged to box. An inner door shall cover the circuit
protective devices and shall be able to be locked.
5. All doors shall be gasketed and be equipped with a tumbler type
vault lock and two (2) additional quarter turn fasteners.
B. Interiors
1. Panelboard interior shall be designed and assembled such that
circuit protective devices shall be solidly connected to the
distribution panel vertical bus. The bus bars shall be attached to the
feeder device by bolts and to the vertical bus by bolts and anti-turn
methods.
2. Circuit breaker connectors shall be designed so that circuit
breakers may be removed without disturbing adjacent devices.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
230
3. Panelboards shall be rated as indicated in drawings.
4. Panelboards shall have three vertically aligned bus bars.
5. Bus bars shall be copper. The bus bars shall have sufficient cross
sectional area to meet UL 67 temperature rise requirements
through actual tests. The bus bars shall be standard density rated
for 1000 amperes per square inch copper.
6. Bus bars shall be phase-sequenced and rigidly supported by high
impact resistant, insulated bus supporting assemblies to prevent
vibration or short circuit mechanical damage.
7. Neutral bus shall be fully rated where indicated on the drawings.
8. All solderless terminations shall be suitable for copper UL listed
wire or cable and shall be tested and listed in conjunction with
appropriate UL standards. Terminations shall be rated for use with
conductor ampacity as assigned in the NEC 75 degree C table.
9. Ground wire terminations shall be provided as an optional kit for
installation by panelboard installer without voiding UL label.
C. Main and Branch Devices
1. Circuit breakers
a. Main and branch circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick
break, and trip indicating, low voltage molded-case, thermal-
magnetic. Breakers shall be bolt-on. Plug-on circuit breakers
are not acceptable.
b. Circuit breaker case shall have ON/OFF and International
I/O position indicators.
c. Breaker faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC
certification standards, and AIC ratings.
d. Circuit breakers shall be factory sealed and shall be date
coded on breaker case.
e. Breakers shall be UL listed for reverse connection without
restrictive line or load markings. Circuit breakers shall be
able to mount in any operating position.
f. All circuit protective devices shall have a minimum
symmetrical current interrupting capacity of 22kA.
Interrupting rating of breakers shall not be less than
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
231
maximum short circuit current available at incoming line
terminals as shown on plans.
g. Breakers shall have UL listed series ratings, if specified in
drawings.
2. Panelboard series-connected ratings shall be attached to the
panelboard enclosure.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Through-feed lugs.
B. Grounding bars.
C. Exterior mounted equipment label.
D. Furnish nameplates for each device as indicated in drawings. Color
schemes shall be as indicated on drawings.
2.5 FINISH
A. Standard panelboard boxes shall be galvanealed (zinc finished) or
galvanized.
B. Fronts shall be coated with phosphatized rust inhibitor and finish coated
with ANSI 61 light gray baked on powder coat.
C. Screw fasteners shall be zinc coated to retard corrosion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. The following procedures shall be performed by the contractor:
1. Verify that low voltage panelboards are ready to install.
2. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
3. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location and
ready for use.
4. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions.
3.2 LOCATION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
232
A. Location shall be as indicated on the drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall install per manufacturer's instructions.
B. Contractor shall install required safety labels.
3.4 FIELD TESTS
A. Perform field tests per Section 16030.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
233
SECTION 16671 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the Surge Protective Device (SPD)
equipment having the electrical characteristics, ratings, and modifications as
specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. To maximize
performance and reliability and to obtain the lowest possible let-through
voltages, the ac surge protection shall be integrated into electrical distribution
equipment such as switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, busway
(integrated within bus plug), or motor control centers. Refer to related sections
for surge requirements.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01330 – Submittals.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. SPD units and all components shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in
accordance with the latest applicable UL standard (ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition).
1.4 SUBMITTALS – FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL
A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:
1. Provide verification that the SPD complies with the required ANSI/UL 1449
3rd Edition listing by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). Compliance may be in the form of
a file number that can be verified on UL’s website or on any other NRTL’s
website, as long as the website contains the following information at a
minimum: model number, SPD Type, system voltage, phases, modes of
protection, Voltage Protection Rating (VPR), and Nominal Discharge
Current (In).
2. For sidemount mounting applications (SPD mounted external to electrical
assembly), electrical/mechanical drawings showing unit dimensions,
weights, installation instruction details, and wiring configuration.
B. Where applicable the following additional information shall be submitted to the
engineer:
1. Descriptive bulletins
2. Product sheets
1.5 SUBMITTALS – FOR CONSTRUCTION
A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
234
1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Section 1.4 and
shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major
components within the assembly.
B. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical
equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the
Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be
provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.
C. The SPD shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances
(RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions. One (1) copy of manufacturer’s instructions shall be included
with the equipment at time of shipment.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each SPD
shipped.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Vendors: Raycap ACData L52XXR
2.2 VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION – GENERAL
A. Electrical Requirements
1. Unit Operating Voltage – Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit
configuration.
2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) – The MCOV shall 140V
line-to-neutral and 280V line-to-line.
3. The suppression system shall incorporate thermally protected metal-oxide
varistors (MOVs) as the core surge suppression component for the service
entrance and all other distribution levels. The system shall not utilize
silicon avalanche diodes, selenium cells, air gaps, or other components
that may crowbar the system voltage leading to system upset or create
any environmental hazards.
4. Protection Modes – The SPD must protect all modes of the electrical
system being utilized. The required protection modes are indicated by
bullets in the following table:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
235
Protection Modes
Configuration L-N L-G L-L N-G
Single Split
Phase
● ● ● ●
5. Nominal Discharge Current (In) – All SPDs applied to the distribution
system shall have a 20kA In rating regardless of their SPD Type (includes
Types 1 and 2) or operating voltage. SPDs having an In less than 20kA
shall be rejected.
6. ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) – The
maximum ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition VPR for the device shall not exceed
the following:
Modes 120/240V
L-N 800
L-L 1200
B. SPD Design
1. Modular Design – The SPD shall have a modular design that is field
upgradable and allows easily replaceable components.
2. Balanced Suppression Platform – The surge current shall be equally
distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and
maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide
equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating
replaceable SPD modules shall not be accepted.
3. Monitoring Diagnostics – Each SPD shall provide the following integral
monitoring options:
a. Protection Status Indicators - Each unit shall have a green / red solid-
state indicator light that reports the status of the protection on each
phase.
1) The absence of a green light and the presence of a red light shall
indicate that damage has occurred. All protection status indicators
must indicate the actual status of the protection. Diagnostics
packages that simply indicate whether power is present on a
particular phase shall not be accepted.
b. Power Indicator – Each unit shall have a yellow LED indicator that
power is on.
c. Remote Alarm Protection Status Indicator – The SPD must include
Form C dry contacts (one NO and one NC) for remote annunciation of
its status. Both the NO and NC contacts shall change state under any
fault condition.
d. Audible Alarm – The SPD shall contain an audible alarm that will be
activated under any fault condition.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
236
4. Overcurrent Protection
a. The unit shall contain thermally protected MOVs. These thermally
protected MOVs shall have a thermal protection element packaged
together with the MOV in order to achieve overcurrent protection of the
MOV. The thermal protection element shall disconnect the MOV(s) from
the system in a fail-safe manner should a condition occur that would
cause them to enter a thermal runaway condition.
5. Safety Requirements
a. SPDs designed to interface with the electrical assembly via conductors
shall require no user contact with the inside of the unit. Such units shall
have any required conductors be factory installed.
b. Sidemount SPDs shall be factory sealed in order to prevent access to
the inside of the unit. Sidemount SPDs shall have factory installed
phase, neutral, ground and remote status contact conductors factory
installed and shall have a pigtail of conductors protruding outside of the
enclosure for field installation.
2.3 SYSTEM APPLICATION
A. The SPD applications covered under this section include distribution and
branch panel locations, busway, motor control centers (MCC), switchgear,
and switchboard assemblies. All SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate
suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C, B, and A
environments.
B. Surge Current Capacity – The minimum surge current capacity the device
is capable of withstanding shall be as shown in the following table:
Minimum surge current capacity based on ANSI / IEEE C62.41 location category
Category Application Per Phase Per Mode
C Service Entrance Locations
(Switchboards, Switchgear,
MCC, Main Entrance)
240 kA 120 kA
B High Exposure Roof Top
Locations (Distribution
Panelboards)
160 kA 80 kA
A Branch Locations (Panelboards,
MCCs, Busway)
120 kA 60 kA
C. SPD Type – all SPDs installed on the line side of the service entrance
disconnect shall be Type 1 SPDs. All SPDs installed on the load side of
the service entrance disconnect shall be Type 1 or Type 2 SPDs.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
237
A. All enclosed equipment shall have NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures,
unless otherwise noted. Provide enclosures suitable for locations as
indicated on the drawings and as described below:
1. NEMA 1 – Constructed of a polymer (units integrated within electrical
assemblies) or steel (side mount units only), intended for indoor use to
provide a degree of protection to personal access to hazardous parts
and provide a degree of protection against the ingress of solid foreign
objects (falling dirt).
2. NEMA 4X – Constructed of stainless steel providing the same level of
protection as the NEMA 4 enclosure with the addition of corrosion
protection (side mount units only).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 FACTORY TESTING
A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this
section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA
and UL standards.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer’s
recommendations and the contract drawings.
3.4 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall provide a full ten (10) year warranty from the date
of shipment against any SPD part failure when installed in compliance
with manufacturer's written instructions and any applicable national or
local code.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
238
SECTION 16785 SELF SUPPORTED TOWER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged design, materials, specifications and
installation for self-supported radio tower
1. Tower
2. FAA approved lighting system
3. Tower erection.
4. Shipping and handling.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of packaged Self-Supporting Tower
indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,
weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal wiring for the lighting control
systems.
2. Drawings and structural calculations shall be signed and sealed
by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of the project,
who is experienced in the design of the Self-Supporting Towers.
C. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer & Dealer.
1. This tower shall be Sabre Towers or Owner approved equal and
who has been regularly engaged in the production of these
towers and associated equipment for a minimum of twenty
years, thereby identifying one source of supply and
responsibility. EQUAL means, having the same system
configuration, operation, footprint of the tower, lighting system
that is approved by FAA and FCC. Alternate offerings must be
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
239
submitted for approval 14 days prior to bid. Tower manufacturer
not approved prior to bid date will be rejected.
2. The manufacturer shall have printed literature and brochures
describing the standard system specified, not a one of a kind
fabrication.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product shall be manufacturer to FAA AC150-5345-43J.
B. Product shall be certified by a 3rd party to FAA AC70-7460-1L.
C. Tower system shall be inspected after manufacturing and tested for 48
hours to ensure each mode operates properly.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: tower shall withstand the following
environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or
degradation of performance capability:
1. Ambient Temperature: 40º C
2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 40 percent.
3. Altitude: 434’.
B. This structure shall meet the requirements for an Ultimate Wind Speed
of 115 mph (Risk Category III), in accordance with the 2016 California
Building Code.
1. Risk Category III
2. Exposure Category C
3. Topographic Category 4
4. Seismic Design Category: D
5. Seismic Importance Factor: 1.25
6. Soil Site Class: C
7. Seismic Design Accelerations per USGS Hazard Map
1.6 COORDINATION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
240
A. Manufacturer to coordinate with the project general contractor
regarding the shipping and handling.
B. Schedule the delivery, handling and installation with the project general
contractor, depending on sequence of work maintained by general
contractor.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturers standard warranty of 5 years for all the materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. 100’ Sabre Model S3TL self-supporting tower. The tower will be
triangular in design with a base width of 11' - 0" tapering to 5' - 0" at the
top. The tower will utilize tubular steel for tower legs and angular steel
for bracing.
1. Sabre Towers or Owner approved equal.
B. FAA compliant E1 type 120VAC medium intensity type.
1. TWR lighting or approved equal.
2.2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Self-supporting tower and lighting system shall comply with the
requirements.
B. Factory-assembled and tested, system.
1. This structure will also meet the requirements for an
Ultimate Wind Speed of 115 mph (Risk Category III), in
accordance with the 2016 California Building Code.
Revision G Parameters:
a. Structure Class III
b. Exposure Category C
c. Topographic Category 4
2. Complete tower steel and hardware
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
241
3. Anchor bolts and templates
4. 16” outside climbing ladder with required 7” standoffs
5. One (1) waveguide support ladder (to support ten (10)
initial lines)
6. One (1) 3' sidearm with one (1) tieback kit and one (1) 10'
mounting pipe at the 98' elevation
7. Two (2) 3' sidearms each with one (1) tieback kit and one
(1) 10' mounting pipe at the 80' elevation
8. Two (2) 4-1/2" O.D. leg dish mounts each at the 70'
elevation
9. Three (3) 3' sidearms each with one (1) tieback kit and
one (1) 5' mounting pipe at the 60' elevation
10. Required lighting mounts
11. Safety cable kit without harness (100')
12. Two (2) waveguide bridges 2-leg 2' x 10' (15' direct
burial) with six (6) 1 level trapeze kits
13. One (1) 2-7/8" x 15' lightning rod extension
14. One (1) 8' x 3/4" lightning rod copper clad and stiffener
15. Twenty-Seven (27) weld-on ground tabs (1/4" x 2 1/2" x
4”)
16. Twenty-Seven (27) Thompson 142 clamp bonding
clamps
17. One Hundred Ten (110) Thompson Class II (28R) 4/0
Rope Lay Copper Conductor 28x14 gas
18. P.E. certified tower profile and foundation drawings
19. Final erection drawings
2.3 TOWER LIGHTING SYSTEM
A. Tower lighting system will include the following:
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
242
1. One (1) TWR P/N-LK1E1L550AVDM FAA Avian E1 120VAC
Medium Intensity Type kit.
a. L-864/865 LED w/integrated DM monitoring lighting
system including,
b. (1)L550-864/865 Dual Red/White Flashing LED Beacon
including integral photocell.
c. (1) CIP400-TWR Alarmed Controller including Form-C
dry contact alarm points, including integrated
IP/SNMP/wireless remote monitoring system with digital
interface.
d. (1) level of (3) OL1V Flashing LED Sidelights with
mounting kit for an applicable face width tower.
e. Single run of TWR beacon/sidelight cabling for a 151-ft to
350-ft tower (w/standard 50-ft of extra cable) and cable
ties.
f. And all miscellaneous installation hardware per TWR
BOM drawing #ORG-640AV designed in accordance with
FAA and FCC specifications.
g. Controller shall have Form C Dry contacts to provide the
following signals:
1) Power failure of the lighting system
2) Beacon failure
2.04 TOWER ERECTION:
A. Tower erection scope shall include the following materials and services
to be installed:
1. Offload tower materials from truck and inventory
2. Erect tower steel complete
3. Install 16” outside climbing ladder with required 7” standoffs
4. Install one (1) waveguide support ladder (to support ten (10)
initial lines)
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
243
5. Install one (1) 3' sidearm with one (1) tieback kit and one (1) 10'
mounting pipe at the 98' elevation
6. Install two (2) 3' sidearms each with one (1) tieback kit and one
(1) 10' mounting pipe at the 80' elevation
7. Install two (2) 4-1/2" O.D. leg dish mounts each at the 70'
elevation
8. Install three (3) 3' sidearms each with one (1) tieback kit and
one (1) 5' mounting pipe at the 60' elevation
9. Install safety cable kit without harness (100')
10. Install two (2) waveguide bridges 2-leg 2' x 10' (15' direct burial)
with six (6) 1 level trapeze kits
11. Install one (1) 2-7/8" x 15' lightning rod extension
12. Install one (1) 8' x 3/4" lightning rod copper clad and stiffener
13. Install twenty-seven (27) weld-on ground tabs (1/4" x 2 1/2" x 4”)
14. Install twenty-seven (27) Thompson 142 clamp bonding clamps
15. Install one hundred ten (110) Thompson Class II (28R) 4/0
Rope Lay Copper Conductor 28x14 gas
16. Install lighting system
B. Antenna Installation: Coordinate with city/general contractor to gather
the antenna and cable materials for installation
1. Install one (1) 6' omni antennas at the 98' elevation each
mounted to a 3' sidearm run coax to the base of the tower and
ran across 20' of wg bridge into an new communications
building (To be terminated by others at the end device).
2. Install two (2) 20' omni antennas at the 80' elevation each
mounted to a 3' sidearm run coax to the base of the tower and
ran across 20' of wg bridge into the new communications
building (To be terminated by others at the end device).
3. Install three (3) 20' omni antennas at the 60' elevation each
mounted to a 3' sidearm run coax to the base of the tower and
ran across 20' of wg bridge into the new communications
building (To be terminated by others at the end device)
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
244
4. Install two (2) 3' HP mw dishes at the 70' elevation each
mounted to a leg dish mount run coax to the base of the tower
and ran across 20' of wg bridge into the new communications
building (To be terminated by others at the end device)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting installation of tower.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturers' written installation and alignment
instructions.
B. Contractor shall call into tower Technical Support Department to run
diagnostics before powering up the system.
END OF SECTION
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
0
APPENDIX A - FORM OF AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT, made on this ______ day of ___________, 20__, by and between
the City of San Luis Obispo, a municipal corporation and charter city, San Luis Obispo
County, California (hereinafter called the Owner) and COMPANY NAME (hereinafter
called the Contractor).
WITNESSETH:
That the Owner and the Contractor for the consideration stated herein agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1, SCOPE OF WORK: The Contractor shall perform everything required to
be performed, shall provide and furnish all of the labor, materials, necessary tools,
expendable equipment, and all utility and transportation services required to complete
all the work of construction of
NAME OF PROJECT, SPEC NO.
in strict compliance with the plans and specifications therefor, including any and all
Addenda, adopted by the Owner, in strict compliance with the Contract Documents
hereinafter enumerated.
It is agreed that said labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services shall be furnished
and said work performed and completed under the direction and supervision and subject
to the approval of the Owner or its authorized representatives.
ARTICLE II, CONTRACT PRICE: The Owner shall pay the Contractor as full
consideration for the faithful performance of this Contract, subject to any additions or
deductions as provided in the Contract Documents, the contract prices as follows:
Item
No.
Item Unit of
Measure
Estimated
Quantity
Item Price
(in figures)
Total
(in figures)
1.
2.
3.
BID TOTAL: $ .00
Payments are to be made to the Contractor in compliance with and subject to the
provisions embodied in the documents made a part of this Contract.
Should any dispute arise respecting the true value of any work omitted, or of any extra
work which the Contractor may be required to do, or respecting the size of any payment
to the Contractor, during the performance of this Contract, said dispute shall be decided
by the Owner and its decision shall be final, and conclusive.
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
1
ARTICLE III, COMPONENT PARTS OF THIS CONTRACT: The Contract consists of the
following documents, all of which are as fully a part thereof as if herein set out in full, and
if not attached, as if hereto attached:
1. Notice to Bidders and Information for Bidders
2. Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards
3. Special Provisions, any Addenda, Plans and Contract Change Orders
4. Caltrans Standard Specifications and Standard Plans 2015
5. Accepted Bid and Bid Bond
6. List of Subcontractors
7. Public Contract Code Sections 10285.1 Statement
8. Public Contract Code Section 10162 Questionnaire
9. Public Contract Code Section 10232 Statement
10. Labor Code Section 1725.5 Statements
11. Bidder Acknowledgements
12. Qualifications
13. Non-collusion Declaration
14. Agreement and Bonds
15. Insurance Requirements and Forms
ARTICLE IV INDEMNIFICATION: The Contractor shall indemnify, defend with legal
counsel approved by City, and hold harmless City, its officers, officials, employees and
volunteers from and against all liability, loss, damage, expense, cost (including without
limitation reasonable legal counsel fees, expert fees and all other costs and fees of
litigation) of every nature arising out of or in connection with the Contractor’s negligence,
recklessness or willful misconduct in the performance of work hereunder or its failure to
comply with any of its obligations contained in this Agreement, except such loss or
damage which is caused by the sole or active negligence or willful misconduct of the City.
Should conflict of interest principles preclude a single legal counsel from representing
both the City and the Contractor, or should the City otherwise find the Contractor’s legal
counsel unacceptable, then the Contractor shall reimburse the City its costs of defense,
including without limitation reasonable legal counsel fees, expert fees and all other costs
and fees of litigation. The Contractor shall promptly pay any final judgment rendered
against the City (and its officers, officials, employees and volunteers) with respect to
claims determined by a trier of fact to have been the result of the Contractor’s negligent,
reckless or wrongful performance. It is expressly understood and agreed that the
foregoing provisions are intended to be as broad and inclusive as is permitted by the law
of the State of California and will survive termination of this Agreement.
The Contractor obligations under this section apply regardless of whether such claim,
charge, damage, demand, action, proceeding, loss, stop notice, cost, expense, judgment,
civil fine or penalty, or liability was caused in part or contributed to by an Indemnitee.
However, without affecting the rights of the City under any provision of this agreement,
the Contractor shall not be required to indemnify and hold harmless the City for liability
attributable to the active negligence of AGENCY, provided such active negligence is
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
2
determined by agreement between the parties or by the findings of a court of competent
jurisdiction. In instances where the City is shown to have been actively negligent and
where the City’s active negligence accounts for only a percentage of the liability involved,
the obligation of the Contractor will be for that entire portion or percentage of liability not
attributable to the active negligence of the City.
ARTICLE V. It is further expressly agreed by and between the parties hereto that should
there be any conflict between the terms of this instrument and the bid of said Contractor,
then this instrument shall control and nothing herein shall be considered as an
acceptance of the said terms of said bid conflicting herewith.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have hereunto set their hands
this year and date first above written.
CITY OF SAN LUIS OBISPO
A Municipal Corporation
__________________________________
Derek Johnson, City Manager
APPROVED AS TO FORM CONTRACTOR:
Name of Company
________________________________
By:________________________________
J. Christine Dietrick
City Attorney
Name of CAO/President
Its: CAO/PRESIDENT
You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)